This translation first appeared in the Sacred Books of The East Series, 1882, along with two others, and the Anugita portion is quoted and amplified extensively in H. P. Blavatsky’s Secret Doctrine, 1888. We have added references to those S. D. page numbers where they apply to the text. This being the first English translation, it was treated in the scholarly fashion by showing every non literal word by parentheses. Since the West has had 100 years to scan these necessary inclusions, we have deleted the parentheses for easier reading, and a more flowing discourse. The old spellings used throughout, such as the soft “G” italicised for the “J” sound, the hard “K” seen in place of the “CH” we use today, will hopefully be forgiven by the reader interested in the sense of the text. To reset the whole text would render the book overpriced. Those interested in the 31 page introduction dealing with the theme of the Mahabharata, and details surrounding the manuscript used, may consult Volume 8 of the SBE series. K. T. Telang states that though he has ascribed Arjuna Misra as commentator to the Sanscrit text, he is not absolutely certain that is the individual whose manuscript was implemented for the translation. However, the Secret Doctrine accepts this proposition in passim, and applauds Mr. Telang as able, but not initiated. . . a statement better understood by consulting the S.D. Commentaries, We have compiled an index and retained the original pagination as cited in the S. D., which seems to single out this translation to the exclusion of the two other Gitas that appeared with it. Mr. Telang is the author of other papers dealing with oriental philosophy, and contributed to The Theosophist (monthly) during its first years, including a series on the Life of Sankaracharya.




                                                    Ganamegaya 1 said :

What conversation, O twice-born one 2 took place between the high-souled Kesava and Arguna, while they dwelt in that palace 3 after slaying their enemies ?

Vaisampâyana said :

The son of Prithâ, after becoming possessed of his kingdom in an undisturbed state , enjoyed himself in the company of Krishna, full of delight in that heavenly palace. And once, O king! they happened to go, surrounded by their people, and rejoicing, to a certain portion of the palace which resembled heaven. Then Arguna, the son of Pându, having surveyed with delight that lovely palace, in
the company of Krishna, spoke these words: O you of mighty arms! O you whose mother is Devakî 4 ! when the battle was about to commence, I became aware of your greatness, and that divine
1   This is the prince to whom the Mahâbhârata, as we have it, purports to have been related.

2   I.e., Vaisampâyana, who relates the Mahâbhârata to Gana megaya.

3  This appears to have been situated at Indraprastha, and to have been
 the one built for the Pândavas by the demon Maya, as related in the Sabhâ Parvan.
4 This is a rather unusual form of address.

230     ANUGÎTÂ.

form of yours1. But that, O Kesava! which through affection for me you explained before 2, has all disappeared, O tiger-like man! from my degenerate mind. Again and again, however, I feel a curiosity about those topics. But now O Mâdhava! you will be going at no distant date to Dvârakâ.’

Vaisampyana said:

Thus addressed, that best of speakers, Krishna, possessed of great glory, replied in these words after embracing Arguna.

Vâsudeva said:

From me, O son of Prithâ! you heard a mystery, and learnt about the eternal 3 principle , about piety in its true form, and about all the everlasting worlds 4. It is excessively disagreeable to me, that you should not have grasped it through want of intelligence. And the recollection of it now again is not possible to me . Really, O son of Pându! you are devoid of faith and of a bad intellect. And, O Dhanańgaya! it is not possible for me to repeat in full what I said before . For that doctrine was perfectly adequate for understanding the seat 5 of the Brahman. It is not possible for me to state it again in full in that way. For then accompanied by my mystic power 6, I declared to you the Supreme Brahman. But I shall relate an ancient story upon
1   Cf. Bhagavadgîtâ, chapters X and XI passim.
2   I.e. in the Bhagavadgîtâ.
3   This may also be taken with piety thus: ‘and learnt about the eternal piety in (its true) form.’
4   As to the plural, see Sańkara on Mundaka, p. 320.
5   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 78. For ‘understanding’ here we might, perhaps, substitute ‘attaining.’ The original word means both understanding
and attaining.
6 Cf. Gîtâ, p. 82.

 231     CHAPTER I, 21.

that subject, so that adhering to this knowledge, you may attain the highest goal. O best of the supporters of piety! listen to all
that I say. Once, O restrainer of foes! there came from the heavenly world and the world of Brahman1 , a Brâhmana difficult to withstand 2, and he was duly honoured by us. Now listen, without entertaining any misgivings, O chief of the descendants of Bharata! O son of Prithâ! to what he said on being interrogated by us according to heavenly rules 3 .

The Brâhmana said:

O Krishna! O destroyer of Madhu! I will explain to you accurately what you, out of compassion for all beings 4 , have asked me touching the duties to be performed for final emancipation. It is destructive of delusion, O Lord! Listen to me with attention 5, as I relate it, O Mâdhava! A certain Brâhmana named Kâsyapa, who had performed much penance, and who best understood piety, approached a certain twice-born person who had learnt the Scriptures relating to all duties 6, having heard of him, as one who had over and over again gone through all knowledge and experience about coming and going 7, who was well versed in the true nature of all worlds 8,
1   This seems to mean not the Supreme Brahman, but the Creator.
2   Cf. Sanatsugâtîya, p. 161, ‘not to be shaken.’
3   I suppose this to mean according to the forms proper in the case of such a being as the one in question. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 62, and note there.
4   This is not easy to understand. Perhaps the allusion is to the doctrine at Gîtâ, pp. 54, 55.
5   Cf. Brihadâranyaka, p. 447.
6   I.e. all prescribed acts of piety.
7   As to knowledge and experience, cf. Gîtâ, p. 57; and as to coming and going, cf. ibid. p. 84.
8    I.e. as stated, forinstance, at Gîtâ, p.79, or Brihadâranyaka, p. 613.

232     ANUGÎTÂ

who knew about happiness and misery1, who knew the truth about birth and death 2, who was conversant with merit and sin, who perceived the migrations of embodied souls of high and low degrees in consequence of their actions, who moved about like an emancipated being, who had reached perfection 3, who was tranquil, whose senses were restrained, who was illumined with the Brahmic splendour 4, who moved about in every direction, who understood concealed movements 5, who was going in company of invisible Siddhas and celestial singers 6, and conversing and sitting together with them in secluded places , who went about as he pleased, and was unattached anywhere like the wind. Having approached him, that talented ascetic possessed of concentration of mind , that best of the twice-born, wishing to acquire piety, fell at his feet, after seeing that great marvel. And amazed on seeing that marvellous man, the best of the twice-born, Kâsyapa, pleased the preceptor by his great devotion. That was all appropriate 7, being joined to sacred learning and correct conduct. And, 0 terror of your foes! he pleased that being by his purity of heart and behaviour (suitable) towards a preceptor . Then being satisfied and pleased, he spoke to the pupil these words, referring to the
1   Cf. infra, p. 245.
2   Cf. Gîtâ, pp. 48, 503.
3   Cf. Gîtâ, passim.
4   Cf. Sanatsugâtîya, p. 162.
5   I.e. moving about so as not to be seen by everybody.
6   Literally, ‘holders of wheels,’ which Arguna Misra interprets to mean ‘Kâranas.’ At Sânti Parvan (Moksha Dharma) CCXLIV, 26 Nîlakantha renders Kakradhara by Kakravartin or Emperor.
7   I.e. as Kâsyapa was possessed of Vedic lore, and behaved as he ought to behave in his capacity of pupil, it was natural that the other should be pleased.

 233     CHAPTER I, 38.

highest perfection. Hear them from me, O Ganârdana!

The Siddha said:

Mortals, O dear friend 1 by their actions which are of mixed character , or which are meritorious and pure, attain to this world as the goal, or to residence in the world of the gods 2 Nowhere is there everlasting happiness; nowhere eternal residence 3. Over and over again is there a downfall from a high position attained with difficulty. Overcome by lust and anger, and deluded by desire, I fell into uncomfortable and harassing states of life , in consequence of my committing sin. Again and again death, and again and again
birth 4. I ate numerous kinds of food, sucked at various breasts, saw various mothers, and fathers of different sorts; and, O sinless one! I saw strange pleasures and miseries. Frequently I suffered separation from those I loved, association with those I did not love. Loss of wealth also came on me, after I had acquired that wealth with difficulty; ignominies full of affliction from princes and likewise from kinsmen; excessively poignant pain, mental and bodily. I also underwent frightful indignities, and fierce deaths and captivities; I had a fall into hell, and torments in the house of Yama 5. I also suffered much from old age, continual ailments, and numerous misfortunes flowing from the pairs of opposites 6 Then on one occasion, being much afflicted with misery, I abandoned the whole
1   The same word as at Gîtâ, p. 72.
2   Cf. Khândogya-upanishad, pp. 356—359, and Gîtâ, p. 84.
3   See Gîtâ, p. 76, and cf. katha, p. 90.
4   For the whole of this passage, cf. Maitrî-upanishad, p. 8.
5   See Manu VI, 61.
6   See Gîtâ, p. 48.

234     ANUGÎTÂ

course of worldly life, through indifference to worldly objects , and taking refuge with the formless principle 1Having learnt about this path in this world, I exercised myself in it, and hence, through favour of the self 2, have I acquired this perfection 3. I shall not come here again 4; I am surveying the worlds, and the happy migrations 5 of my self from the creation of beings to my attaining perfection. Thus, O best of the twice-born! have I obtained this highest perfection. From here I go to the next 6 world , and from there again to the still higher world —the imperceptible seat of the Brahman. Have no doubt on that, O terror of your foes 7 ! I shall not come back to this mortal world. I am pleased with you, O you of great intelligence. Say, what can I do for you? The time is now come for that which you desired in coming to me. I know for what you have come to me. But I shall be going away in a short time, hence have I given
1   Taking refuge, says Nîlakantha, in the belief of my being identical with the Brahman, which is to be comprehended by means of the profound contemplation called Asampragńâta Samâdhi.
2   I.e., says Nîlakantha, the mind, and he cites Maitrî, p. 179. Cf. Katha, p. 108. The rendering at p. 192 supra will also suit (through
the self becoming placid). This placidity is defined at Sânti Parvan (Moksha Dharma) CCXLVII, ii, with which cf. Gîtâ, p. 69. See
Gîtâ, p. 51.
3   As above described.
4   Cf. Khândogya, p. 628; See also ibid. p. 282.
5   He calls them happy because they have ended happily, I presume. ‘Surveying the worlds’ Nîlakantha takes to be an index of omniscience. Cf. Sanatsugâtîya, p.174. See also Yoga sűtras III, 25, and commentary there.
6   I.e. the world of Brahman, or the Satyaloka; and the next step is assimilation into the Brahman.
7   So read all the copies I have seen, though Kâsyapa is the person addressed.

235     CHAPTER II, 5.

this hint to you. I am exceedingly pleased, O clever one. with your good conduct. Put your questions without uneasiness, I will tell you whatever you desire. I highly esteem your intelligence, and greatly respect it, inasmuch as you have made me out 1; for,
0 Kâsyapa you are (a) talented man.

Vâsudeva2 said:

Then grasping his feet, Kâsyapa asked questions very difficult to explain, and all of them that being the best of the supporters of piety, did explain.

Kâsyapa said:

How does the body perish, and how, too, is it produced ? How does one who moves in this harassing course of worldly life become freed? And how does the self, getting rid of nature, abandon the body produced from it 3? And how, being freed from the body, does he attain to the other 4? How does this man enjoy the good and evil acts done by himself? And where do the acts of one who is released from the body remain?

The Brâhmana said:

Thus addressed, O descendant of Vrishni! that Siddha answered these questions in order. Hear me relate what he said .
1   This was difficult, as the Siddha possessed extraordinary powers, such as that of concealed movement, &c.
2    Sic in MSS.
3   Cf. as to getting rid of nature, Gîtâ, pp. 75—206. As to the body produced from nature, cf. ibid. p. 112, and pp. 317—318 infra.
4   I.e. the Brahman, says Nîlakantha.

236     ANUGÎTÂ

The Siddha said:

When those actions, productive of long life and fame 1, which a man performs here, are entirely exhausted, after his assumption of another body, he performs actions of an opposite character, his self being overcome at the exhaustion of life 2. And his ruin being impending, his understanding goes astray. Not knowing his own constitution , and strength, and likewise the proper season, the man not being self-controlled, does unseasonably what is injurious to himself. When he attaches himself to numerous very harassing actions ; eats too much 4, or does not eat at all; when he takes bad food, or meat 5, or drinks, or kinds of food incompatible with one another, or heavy food in immoderate quantities, or without previously taken food being properly digested; or takes too much exercise, or is incontinent; or constantly, through attachment to action, checks the regular course of the excretions 6 ; or takes juicyfood 7 or sleeps by day 8; or takes food not thoroughly prepared; such a man himself aggravates the dis-
1   One reading omits ‘fame,’ as to which cf. Taittirîya-upanishad, p. 129; Khândogya, pp. 122—227. As to long life, cf. Khândogya, p. 272; exhausted, i.e. by enjoyment of fruit in another world.
2   Cf. Sârîraka Bhâshya, p. 753 seq., where we have a slightly different view.
3   Arguna Misra renders the original, sattva, by svabhâva.
4   Cf. for all this, Gîtâ, pp.62,69, 118, which passages, however, are from a slightly different point of view. See also Khândogya, p. 526.
5   A various reading here excludes meat. But cf. Âpastamba I, I, 2, 23; Gautama II, 13.
6   So says Nîlakantha.
7   I. e. which turns to juice in digestion, much juice being a cause of indigestion, say the commentators.
8   This is doubtful. The sense may be, ‘who takes juicy or not thoroughly prepared food by day and night.’ But see Âsvalâyana Grihya-sűtra, p. 90; Âpastamba I, 1, 2, 24; Gautama II, 13.

237     CHAPTER II, 20.

orders in the body when the time comes1. By aggravating the disorders in his own body, he contracts a disease which ends in death, or he even engages in unreasonable acts , such as hanging 2 oneself . From these causes, the living 3 body of that creature then perishes. Learn about that correctly as I am about to state it. Heat being kindled in the body, and being urged by a sharp wind 4, pervades the whole frame, and, verily, checks the movements of all the life-winds. Know this truly, that excessively powerful heat, if kindled in the body, bursts open the vital parts—the seats of the soul 5. Then the soul, full of torments, forthwith falls away from the perishable body. Know, O best of the twice-born! that every creature leaves the body, when the vital parts are burst open, its self being overcome with torments. All beings are constantly distracted with birth and death; and, O chief of the twice-born! are seen abandoning their bodies, or entering the womb on the exhaustion of their previous actions 6. Again, a man suffers similar torments, having his joints broken and suffering from
1   The time of destruction, says Arguna Misra.
2   Which, say the commentators, leads to death, even without any disease.
3   So I construe the original, having regard to the question, ‘how does the body perish?’ The other reading, which is in some respects
     better, is equivalent to ‘the life falls away from the body of that creature.’
4   This is different, as the commentators point out, from the ordinary life-winds.
5   The original here is gîva, not âtman, which we have rendered ‘self.’ This refers rather to the vital principle. As to the seats,
     cf. Yâgńavalkya Smriti III.
6   I adopt the reading karmanâm, which I find in one of the MSS. I consulted. I think it probable that that was the reading before
     the commentators. The other reading is marmanâm.

238     ANUGÎTÂ

cold, in consequence of water 1. As the compact association of the five elements is broken up, the wind in the body, distributed within the five elements 2, between the upward and downward life-winds, being aggravated by cold, and urged by a sharp wind 3, goes upwards 4, abandoning the embodied self in consequence of pain. Thus it 5 leaves the body, which appears devoid of breath. Then devoid of warmth, devoid of breath, devoid of beauty, and with consciousness destroyed, the man, being abandoned by the Brahman 6, is said to be dead. Then he ceases to perceive anything with those very currents 7 with which the supporter of the body 8 perceives objects of sense. In the same way, it is the eternal soul which preserves in the body the life-winds which are produced from food . Whatever part of the body is employed in the collection 10 of that, know
1   Having spoken of heat, he now speaks of the effects of cold. I am not sure if the water here refers to the water of the ‘juicy’
     substances before referred to.
2    This means, I presume, within the dissolving body. Cf. Maitriupanishad, p. 42.
3    See note 4, last page.
4    To the head, Arguna Misra
5    That is, the wind, I suppose, and then the breath departs from the body, and the man is said to die. ‘Devoid of beauty,’ further
       on, means, disfigured in the state of death.
6   I. e. the mind, Arguna Misra.
7   The senses. Cf. Svetâsvatara, p. 288.
8   See and cf. p. 262 infra.
9   This, says Arguna Misra, is in answer to the possible question why this ‘sharp wind’ does not work with the life-winds. The answer
      is, that such working requires the presence of the soul, which Arguna Misra says here means ‘mind.’ As to ‘production from
      food,’ cf. Khândogya, p. 421 seq., and Taittiriya Aranyaka, p. 893.
10   Collection of that = turning the food into semen, says Arguna Misra, who adds, ‘in those vital parts, which are useful for this
       purpose, the life-wind dwells.’

 237     CHAPTER II, 20.

orders in the body when the time comes 1 By aggravating the disorders in his own body , he contracts a disease which ends in death, or he even engages in unreasonable acts, such as hanging 2 oneself . From these causes, the living 3 body of that creature then perishes. Learn about that correctly as I am about to state it. Heat being kindled in the body, and being urged by a sharp wind 4, pervades the whole frame, and, verily, checks the movements of all the life-winds. Know this truly, that excessively powerful heat, if kindled in the body, bursts open the vital parts—the seats of the soul 5. Then the soul, full of torments, forthwith falls away from the perishable body. Know, O best of the twice-born! that every creature leaves the body, when the vital parts are burst open, its self being overcome with torments. All beings are constantly distracted with birth and death; and, O chief of the twice-born! are seen abandoning their bodies, or entering the womb on the exhaustion of their previous actions 6. Again, a man suffers similar torments, having his joints broken and suffering from
1   The time of destruction, says Arguna Misra.
2   Which, say the commentators, leads to death, even without any disease.
3   So I construe the original, having regard to the question, ‘how does the body perish?’ The other reading, which is in some respects
      better, is equivalent to ‘the life falls away from the body of that creature.’
4   This is different, as the commentators point out, from the ordinary life-winds.
5   The original here is gîva, not âtman, which we have rendered ‘self.’ This refers rather to the vital principle. As to the seats, cf.
     Yâgńavalkya Smriti III.
6   I adopt the reading karmanâm, which I find in one of the MSS. I consulted. I think it probable that that was the reading before
      the commentators. The other reading is marmanâm.


238     ANUGÎTÂ

cold, in consequence of water 1. As the compact association of the five elements is broken up, the wind in the body, distributed within the five elements 2, between the upward and downward life-winds, being aggravated by cold, and urged by a sharp wind 3, goes upwards 4, abandoning the embodied self in consequence of pain. Thus it 5 leaves the body, which appears devoid of breath. Then devoid of warmth, devoid of breath, devoid of beauty, and with consciousness destroyed, the man, being abandoned by the Brahman 6, is said to be dead. Then he ceases to perceive anything with those very currents 7with which the supporter of the body 8 perceives objects of sense. In the same way, it is the eternal soul which preserves in the body the life-winds which are produced from food 9. Whatever part of the body is employed in the collection 10 of that, know
1   Having spoken of heat, he now speaks of the effects of cold. I am not sure if the water here refers to the water of the ‘juicy’
      substances before referred to.
2   This means, I presume, within the dissolving body. Cf. Maitrî-upanishad, p. 42.
3   See note 4, last page.
4   To the head, Arguna Misra.
5   That is, the wind, I suppose, and then the breath departs from the body, and the man is said to die. ‘Devoid of beauty,’ further on,
      means, disfigured in the state of death.
6   I. e. the mind, Arguna Misra.
7   The senses. Cf. Svetâsvatara, p. 288.
8   See and cf. p. 262 infra.
9   This, says Arguna Misra, is in answer to the possible question why this ‘sharp wind’ does not work with the life-winds. The answer is, that such working requires the presence of the soul, which Arguna Misra says here means ‘mind.’ As to ‘production from food,’ cf. Khândogya, p. 421 seq., and Taittiriya Aranyaka, p. 893.
10    Collection of that = turning the food into semen, says Arguna Misra, who adds, ‘in those vital parts, which are useful for this purpose, the life-wind dwells.’


 239     CHAPTER II, 34.

that to be a vital part, for thus it is seen laid down in the Scriptures. Those vital parts being wounded, that wind directly comes out therefrom, and entering the bosom of a creature obstructs the heart 1. Then the possessor of consciousness knows nothing 2 Having his knowledge enveloped by darkness 3, while the vitals are still enveloped, the soul , being without a fixed seat, is shaken about by the wind. And then he heaves a very deep and alarming gasp, and makes the unconscious body quiver as he goes out of it. That soul, dropping out of the body, is surrounded on both sides by his own actions 5, his own pure and meritorious, as also his sinful ones. Brâhmanas, possessed of knowledge, whose convictions are correctly formed from sacred learning, know him by his marks as one who has performed meritorious actions or the reverse. As those who have eyes see a glow-worm disappear here and there in darkness, so likewise do those who have eyes of knowledge. Such a soul, the Siddhas see with a divine eye, departing from the body , or coming to the birth, or entering into a womb 6. Its three descriptions 7 of seats are here learnt from the Scriptures. This world is the world of actions 8, where
1   Arguna Misra renders this to mean ‘mind.’
2   As the mind is obstructed, says Arguna Misra. The possessor of consciousness—the self Arguna.
3   I. e. pain, Arguna Misra.
4   I.e. mind, Arguna Misra.
5   Cf. Brihadâranyaka, p. 843.
6   See Aitareya-upanishad, p. 222, and Sańkara’s commentary there. The coming to the birth is the coming out of the
     womb into the world. Cf. also Gîtâ, p. 112.
7    As stated further on, viz. this world, the next world, and the womb. With this compare Khândogya, p. 359.
8    Cf. our Bhartrihari (Bombay series), Notes (Nîtisataka), p. 27.

240     ANUGÎTÂ

creatures dwell. All embodied selfs , having here performed good or evil actions , obtain the fruit. It is here they obtain higher or lower enjoyments by their own actions. And it is those whose actions here are evil, who by their actions go to hell. Harassing is that lower place where men are tormented. Freedom from it is very difficult, and the self should be specially protected from it. Learn from me now the seats in which creatures going up 1 dwell, and which I shall describe truly. Hearing this, you will learn the highest knowledge, and decision regarding action 2 All the worlds in the forms of stars, and this lunar sphere 3, and also this solar sphere which shines in the world by its own lustre, know these to be the seats of men who perform meritorious actions. All these, verily, fall down again and again in consequence of the exhaustion of their actions 4. And there, too, in heaven, there are differences of low, high, and middling 5. Nor, even there, is there satisfaction, (even) after a sight of most magnificent splendour. Thus have I stated to you these seats distinctly. I will after this proceed to state to you the production of the fśtus 6 And, O twice-born one! hear that attentively from me as I state it.
1   Cf. on this and ‘lower place,’ Gitâ, p. 109; Sâńkhya Kârikâ, 44.
2    The readings here are most unsatisfactory. The meaning of the printed reading adopted above would seem to be, ‘decision as to
       what actions should be performed,’ &c.
3   Cf. Gitâ, p. 81, and Sanatsugâtîya, p. 158. Cf. Gitâ, p. 84.
4   Arguna Misra says, ‘In heaven = in the next world, low= inferior (?), high = heaven, and middling = the space below the skies
     (antariksha).’ For the three degrees of enjoyment in heaven, see Yogavâsishtha I, 35 seq.
6   This is the third of the three seats above referred to.

 241    CHAPTER III, 7.


There is no destruction here of actions good or not good 1. Coming to one body after another they become ripened in their respective ways 2 As a fruitful tree producing fruit may yield much fruit, so does merit performed with a pure mind become expanded . Sin, too, performed with a sinful mind, is similarly expanded 3. For the self engages in action, putting forward this mind 4. And now further, hear how 5 a man, overwhelmed with action, and enveloped in desire and anger 6, enters a womb. Within the womb of a woman, he obtains as the result of action a body good or else bad 7, made up of virile semen and blood. Owing to his subtlety and imperceptibility, though he obtains a body appertaining to the Brahman, he is not attached anywhere; hence is he the eternal Brahman 8. That is the seed of all beings; by that
1    Cf. Maitrî-upanishad, p. 53, and Mundaka, p. 270. And see generally as to this passage, Sârîraka Bhâshya, pp. 751
2    I.e. they yield their respective fruits; cf. Maitri, p. 43, and Khândogya, p. 358.
3   This explains, say the commentators, how even a little merit or sin requires sometimes more than one birth to enjoy and exhaust.
4   As a king performs sacrifices ‘putting forward’ a priest, Arguna Misra; and cf. Dhammapada, the first two verses.
5   Arguna Misra has tathâ, ‘in the same way,’ instead of this, and renders it to mean ‘putting forward’ the mind.
6    Hence he does not get rid of birth and death.
7   Good=of gods or men; bad=of the lower species of creatures, Arguna.
8    He, in the preceding sentences, according to Arguna Misra, means the self, through the mind, or ‘putting forward’ the mind, as
       said above. In this sentence, he takes ‘he’ to mean the mind itself; Brahman=the self; and the mind, he says, is called the
       Brahman, as it, like the self, is the cause of the Kaitanya, intelligence, in all creatures.

242     ANUGÎTÂ

all creatures exist. That soul, entering all the limbs of the fśtus, part by part, and dwelling in the seat of the life-wind 1, supports them with the mind 2 Then the fśtus, becoming possessed of consciousness, moves about its limbs. As liquefied iron being poured out assumes the form of the image 3, such you must know is the entrance of the soul into the fśtus. As fire entering a ball of iron, heats it, such too, you must understand, is the manifestation of the soul in the fśtus. And as a blazing lamp shines in a house, even so does consciousness light up bodies 4. And whatever action he performs, whether good or bad, everything done in a former body must necessarily be enjoyed or suffered. Then 5 that is exhausted, and again other action is accumulated, so long as the piety which dwells in the practice of concentration of mind for final emancipation 7 has not been learnt. As to that, O best of men ! I will tell you about that action by which, verily, one going the round of various births, becomes happy. Gifts, penance, life as a Brahmakârin, adherence to prescribed regulations, restraint of the senses 7, and also
1   I.e. the heart.
2   Arguna Misra says that the soul at the beginning of the sentence means the mind, and mind here means knowledge or
      intelligence. Cf. p. 238 supra.
3   In the mould of which, that is to say, it is poured.
4   Cf. Gitâ,, p. io6. The three similes, says Nîlakantha, show that the soul pervades the whole body, is yet imperceptible, and also
      unattached to the body. Arguna Misra’s explanation is different, but I prefer Nîlakantha’s.
5   I. e. by the enjoyment or suffering.
6   I. e. while he does not possess the knowledge which leads to the piety necessary as a preliminary for final emancipation, and
      which ultimately destroys action. Cf. Gitâ, p. 62.
7   I. e. keeping the senses of hearing &c. from all operations save those relating to the Brahman. Tranquillity is the same thing as
      regards the mind.

243     CHAPTER III, 23.

tranquillity, compassion to all beings, self- restraint, and absence of cruelty, refraining from the appropriation of the wealth of others, not acting dishonestly even in thought towards any being in this world, serving mother and father, honouring deities and guests, honouring preceptors, pity, purity, constant restraint of the organs 1, and causing good to be done; this is said to be the conduct of the good 2. From this is produced piety, which protects people to eternity. Thus one should look for it among the good, for among them it constantly abides. The practice to which the good adhere, points out what piety is 3. And among them dwells that course of action which constitutes eternal piety. He who acquires that, never comes to an evil end 4. By this are people held in check from making a slip in the paths of piety 5. But the devotee who is released 6 is esteemed higher than these. For the deliverance from the course of worldly life of the man who acts piously and well, as he should act, takes place after a long time 7. Thus a creature always meets with the effects of the action performed in a previous (life). And that 8 is the sole cause by which he comes here in a degraded form. There is
1   This I take to mean restraint of the active organs, such as speech, &c. ‘Self-restraint’ is rendered by Nîlakantha to mean
     ‘concentration of mind.’
2   Cf. Maitrî, p.57; Khândogya, p. 136; and Gîtâ, pp. 103, 129.
3   Cf. Âpastamba I, i, i, 2 ; I, 7, 20, 7; Sakuntalâ, p. 30 (Williams).
4   Cf. Gîtâ p. 72.
5   By this, i. e. by the practice of the good, Arguna Misra.
6   From delusion, Arguna Misra; emancipated by force of his devotion, Nîlakantha.
7   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 73; Khândogya, pp. 236, 137.
8   Scil. the action.

244     ANUGÎT 

in the world a doubt as to what originally was the source from which he became invested with a body. And that I shall now proceed to state. Brahman, the grandfather of all people, having made a body for himself, created the whole of the three worlds, moving and fixed 1. From that he created the Pradhâna, the material cause of all embodied selfs , by which all this is pervaded, and which is known in the world as the highest 2. This is what is called the destructible 3 ; but the other 4 is immortal and indestructible. And Pragâpati, who had been first created, created all creatures and all the fixed entities, having as regards the moving creation , a pair separately for each 5 species . Such is the ancient (tradition) heard by us . And as regards that, the grandsire fixed a limit of time, and a rule about migrations among various creatures, and about the return 6. What I say is all correct and proper, like what may be said by any talented person who has in
1   I.e. animate and inanimate. ‘A body for himself’= undeveloped Akása, Nîlakantha. But see Sâńkhya-sâra, p. 19, and Sâńkhya-
     Prav. Bhâshya I, 122,  and III, 10.
2   Cf. inter alia Gîtâ, p. 58 and note, and Sâńkhya-sâra, p. 11. As to the words at the beginning of this sentence, ‘from that,’ cf.
      Taittirîya-upanishad, p. 67, where everything is derived from Akâsa, mentioned in the last note, and Akâsa from the Brahman.
3   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 113, where there are three principles distinguished from each other.
4   I.e. the self, Arguna Misra.
5   A pair, i. e. a male and female for each species, such as man, &c., Arguna Misra.
6   Pragâpati fixed the limit of life for every ‘moving ‘ creature, and the rule as to going from one species of body into another, and as
     to going from one world to another. As to a part of ‘the ancient tradition,’ the first stanza of the Mundaka-upanishad may be

 245     CHAPTER IV, I.

a former birth perceived the self 1. He who properly perceives pleasure and pain to be inconstant, the body to be an unholy aggregate 2, and ruin to be connected with action , and who remembers that whatever little there is of happiness is all misery 4, he will cross beyond the fearful ocean of worldly life, which is very difficult to cross. He who understands the Pradhâna 5, though attacked by birth and death and disease, sees one principle of consciousness in all beings possessed of consciousness 6. Then seeking after the supreme seat, he becomes indifferent to everything 7. O best of men ! I will give you accurate instruction concerning it. Learn from me exhaustively, O Brâhmana the excellent knowledge concerning the eternal imperishable seat, which I am now about to declare.


He who becoming placid 8, and thinking of nought, may become absorbed in the one receptacle , abandoning each previous element , he will cross beyond
1   Arguna Misra says the strength of the impression in the former birth would give him this knowledge in the subsequent birth.
2   Cf. Sanatsugâtîya, p. 155.
3   Cf. inter alia p. 256 infra.
4   Cf. Gîtâ, P. 79.
5   Otherwise called Prakriti, or nature.
6   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 124.
7   Cf. Gîtâ, p. iii.
8   We now begin, as Nîlakantha points out, the answer to the question put above by Kâsyapa about the emancipation of the self.
      Placid, Arguna Misra renders to mean ‘silent, taciturn.’ See p. 234 supra.
9   The path of knowledge, says Arguna Misra; the Brahman, says Nîlakantha. Abandoning each element = absorbing the gross into the subtle elements, and so forth, Nîlakantha; abandoning each elementary mode of worship till one reaches that of contemplating the absolute Brahman, Arguna Misra.

246     ANUGÎTÂ

(all) bonds. A man who is a friend of all, who endures all, who is devoted to tranquillity 1, who has subdued his senses, and from whom fear and wrath have departed, and who is self-possessed 2, is released. He who moves among all beings as if they were like himself 3, who is self-controlled, pure, free from vanity 4 and egoism, he is, indeed, released from everything. And he, too, is released who is equable towards both life and death 5, and likewise pleasure and pain, and gain and loss, and what is agreeable and odious 6 He who is not attached to any one, who contemns no one, who is free from the pairs of opposites, and whose self is free from affections 7, he is, indeed, released in every way. He who has no enemy, who has no kinsmen, who has no child, who has abandoned piety, wealth, and lust altogether, and who has no desire, is released. He who is not pious and not impious 8, who casts off the merit or sin previously accumulated, whose self is tranquillised by the exhaustion of the primary elements of the body 9, and who is free from the pairs of opposites, is released. One who does no action 10, and who has no desire, looks on this universe as
1   This, in the terminology of the Vedanta, means keeping the mind from everything save ‘hearing’ &c. about the Brahman.
2   One who has his mind under his control. But see Gîtâ, p. 6.
3   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 71.
4   I. e. the desire to be honoured or respected, Arguna Misra. Cf. Sanatsugâtiya, p. 161.
5   Who does not care when death comes.
6   Cf. p. 151 supra.
7   Cf. Gîtâ for all this, pp. 101, 103, 125, &c.
8   Cf. Katha, p. 101.
9   Nîlakantha says this means the constituents of the body. Arguna Misra says, ‘Prâna or life-wind,’ &c. They are seven. See gloss on
    Khândogya-upanishad, p. 441.
10   Because, says Arguna Misra, he has no desire. Nîlakantha says this means an ascetic, sannyâsin.

 247     CHAPTER IV, 13.

transient, like an Asvattha tree 1, always full of birth, death, and old age 2. Having his understanding always fixed upon indifference to worldly objects, searching for his own faults 3, he procures the release of his self from bonds in no long time. Seeing the self void of smell 4, void of taste, void of touch, void of sound, void of belongings, void of colour, and unknowable, he is released. He who sees the enjoyer of the qualities 5, devoid of qualities, devoid of the qualities of the five elements 6, devoid of form, and having no cause, is released. Abandoning by the understanding 7 all fancies bodily and mental 8, he gradually obtains tranquillity 9, like fire devoid of fuel. He who is free from all impressions 10, free from the pairs of opposites, without belongings, and who moves among the collection of organs with penance 11 he is indeed released. Then freed from all impressions, he attains to the eternal
1   Cf. Gîtâ, p. iii, where Sańkara explains the name to mean ‘what will not remain even till to-morrow.’
2   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 109, and other passages.
3   Arguna Misra has a different reading, which means ‘particularly observing the evils of (the three kinds of) misery.’
4   Cf. Katha, p.119 : Mundaka, p. 267 ; and Mândukya, p.371.
5   Cf. Gîtâ, pp. 104, 105, and Katha, p. 112.
6   Nîlakantha says this refers to the gross elements, the next expression to the subtle ones, and being free from these two, he is ‘devoid
      of qualities,’ viz, the three qualities.
7   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 65.
8   I. e. those which cause bodily and mental activity.
9   Cf. Maitrî, p. 178. The original is the famous word ‘Nirvana.’
10  Scil. derived from false knowledge, says Arguna Misra. Nîlakantha says all impressions from outside oneself which are destroyed
       by those produced from concentration of mind, &c. See p. 391 infra.
11   I. e. all those operations by which the internal man is rendered pure and free from all taints; see below, p.248, where Nîlakantha
         renders it as ‘the performance of one’s duty which is called penance.’ But see, too, pp. 74, 119, 166 supra. The meaning seems
        to be that the man in question lets his senses work, but does not permit himself to be in any way identified with their operations.
        Cf. Gîtâ, p. 64.

248     ANUGÎTÂ

Supreme Brahman, tranquil, unmoving, constant, indestructible 1. After this I shall explain the science of concentration of mind, than which there is nothing higher, and which teaches how devotees concentrating their minds perceive the perfect self 2. I will impart instruction regarding it accurately. Learn from me the paths 3 by which one directing the self within the self perceives the eternal 4 principle. Restraining the senses, one should fix the mind on the self; and having first performed rigorous penance 5, he should practise concentration of mind for final emancipation. Then the talented Brâhmana, who has practised penance, who is constantly practising concentration of mind, should act on the precepts of the science of concentration of mind 6, seeing the self in the self by means of the mind 7. If such a good man is able to concentrate the self on the self, then he, being habituated to exclusive meditation 8, perceives the self in the self. Being
1   Cf. the expressions at Gîtâ, p. 45. ‘Unmoving,’ which occurs at Îsa, p. l0, is there explained by Sańkara to mean ‘always the same.’
      The same sense is given by Mahîdhara. Weber’s Satapatha, p. 980.
2   ‘Perfect’ would seem to mean here free from all bonds or taints, the absolute.
3   I. e. sources of knowledge, says Arguna Misra.
4   Cf. as to ‘directing the self within the self,’ Gîtâ, p. 69. Nîlakantha says, ‘paths, means of mental restraint, the self, mind; in the self
      in the body.’
5   See p. 247, note
ii. Nîlakantha’s note there referred to occurs on this passage. See also p. 166, note i supra.
6    It is not easy to say what this science is. Is it Patańgali’s system that is meant? No details occur to enable one to identify the
7   See note 4 above.
8    Nîlakantha has a very forced explanation of the original word, which also occurs further on; he takes the meaning to be, ‘he who is
      habituated to that by which the One is attained, viz, meditation.’

CHAPTER IV, 25. 249

self-restrained and self-possessed 1, and always concentrating his mind, and having his senses subjugated, he who has achieved proper concentration of mind 2 sees the self in the self. As a person having seen one in a dream, recognises him afterwards saying, ‘This is he;’ so does one who has achieved proper concentration of mind perceive the self 3. And as one may show the soft fibres, after extracting them from the Muńga, so does a devotee see the self extracted from the body. The body is called the Muńga; the soft fibres stand 4 for the self. This is the excellent illustration propounded by those who understand concentration of mind. When an embodied self properly perceives the self concentrated 5, then there is no ruler over him, since he is the lord of the triple world 6 He obtains various bodies as he pleases; and casting aside old age and death, he grieves not and exults not, The man who
1   The original is the same as at Gîtâ, p. 63.
2   That is to say, one who has got the power of concentrating his mind as he pleases; and the words ‘always concentrating’ &c., just
      before, would mean ‘one who always exercises that power.’
3   I. e. having perceived the self in the state of concentration, he sees the whole universe to be the self in this state when the
     concentration has ceased, Nîlakantha. Arguna Misra says, ‘having perceived the self at the time of concentration, he recognises
     it as the same at the time of direct perception,’ meaning, apparently, the time of final emancipation.
4   I. e. the reality, which in this simile forms the substratum of what are called the fibres; the simile is in the Katha-upanishad; see,
      too, Sanatsugâtîya, p. 176.
5   “ I. e. on the supreme self, as above explained.
6   Cf. Sanatsugâtîya, p. 161; Svetâsvatara, p. 290; and Brihadâranyaka, p. 218; .Khândogya, p.523; Aitareya, p.26;
Kaushîtaki, p.126.

250     ANUGÎTÂ

has acquired concentration of mind, and who is self-restrained, creates for himself even the divinity of the gods 1; and abandoning the transient body, he attains to the inexhaustible Brahman. When (all) beings are destroyed, he has no fear; when (all) beings are afflicted, he is not afflicted by anything 2 He whose self is concentrated, who is free from attachment, and of a tranquil mind, is not shaken by the fearful effects of attachment and affection 3, which consist in pain and grief 4. Weapons do not pierce him 5; there is no death for him; nothing can be seen anywhere in the world happier than he. Properly concentrating his self; he remains steady to the self; and freed from old age and grief, he sleeps at ease. Leaving this human frame, he assumes bodies at pleasure. But one who is practising concentration should never become despondent 6. When one who has properly achieved concentration perceives the self in the self, then he forthwith ceases to feel any attachment to Indra himself 7.
1  I do not quite understand the original. The other reading, dehatvam for devatvam, is not more intelligible. But comparing the two, the meaning seems to be, that the divinity of the gods, i. e. their qualities and powers as gods, are within his reach, if he likes to have them.
2   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 107.
3   Affection is the feeling that a thing is one’s own; attachment is the feeling of liking one has for a thing acquired with difficulty,
     Arguna Misra.
4   Pain appears to be the feeling immediately following on hurt or evil suffered; grief is the constant state of mind which is a later
5   Cf. Yoga-sűtra Bhâshya, p. 208.
6   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 70. Despondency is the feeling that one has not acquired ‘concentration’ after much practice, and that therefore the
      practice should be abandoned.
7   The other reading here may be rendered, ‘Then forthwith Indra himself esteems him highly.’

251     CHAPTER IV, 36.

Now listen how one habituated to exclusive meditation attains concentration. Thinking 1 of a quarter seen before, he should steady his mind within and not out of the city in which he dwells. Remaining within that city, he should place his mind both in its external and internal operations in that habitation in which he dwells. When, meditating in that habitation, he perceives the perfect one, his mind should not in any way wander outside. Restraining the group of the senses, in a forest 2 free from noises and unpeopled, he should meditate on the perfect one within his body with a mind fixed on one point. He
1  This is all rather mystical. Nîlakantha takes ‘city’ to mean ‘body,’ and ‘habitation’ to mean the műlâdhâra, or other similar mystic centre within the body, where, according to the Yoga philosophy, the soul is sometimes to be kept with the life-winds, &c. ‘Thinking of a quarter,’ &c., he explains to mean ‘meditating on the instruction he has received after studying the Upanishads.’ I do not understand the passage well. ‘City’ for ‘body’ is a familiar use of the word. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 65. The original word for habitation occurs at Aitareya-upanishad, p. 199, where Sańkara explains it to mean ‘seat.’ Three ‘seats’ are there mentioned,— the organs of sight, &c.; the mind; and the Akâsa in the heart. There, too, the body is described as a ‘city,’ and Ânandagiri explains habitation to mean ‘seat of amusement or sport.’ Here, however, the meaning seems to be that one should work for concentration in the manner indicated, viz, first fix the mind on the city where one dwells, then on the particular parts of it oftenest seen before, then one’s own habitation, then the various parts of one’s body, and finally one’s own heart and the Brahman within it. Thus gradually circumscribed in its operations, the mind is better fitted for the final concentration on the Brahman. As to external and internal operations, cf. note 8, p. 247. The perfect one is the Brahman. Cf. Sanatsugâtîya, p. 171. As to âvasatha, which we have rendered by ‘habitation,’ see also Mândukya, p. 340; Brihadâranyaka, p. 752 ; and the alternative sense suggested by Sańkara on the Aitareya, loc. cit.
2   Cf. Maitrî-upanishad, p. 100.

252     ANUGÎTÂ

should meditate on his teeth 1, palate, tongue, neck, and throat likewise, and also the heart, and likewise the seat of the heart. That talented pupil, O destroyer of Madhu! having been thus instructed by me, proceeded further to interrogate me about the piety required for final emancipation, which is difficult to explain. ‘How does this food eaten from time to time become digested in the stomach? How does it turn to juice and how also to blood? And how, too, do the flesh, and marrow, and muscles, and bones—which all form the bodies for embodied selfs—develop in a woman as that self develops? How, too, does the strength develop? And how is it also about the removal of non-nutritive substances 2, and of the excretions, distinctly? How, too, does he breathe inwards or outwards? And what place does the self occupy, dwelling in the self 3? And how does the soul moving about carry the body ? And of what colour and of what description is it when he leaves it? O sinless venerable sir! be pleased to state this accurately to me.’ Thus questioned by that Brâhmana, O Mâdhava! I replied 4, ‘O you of mighty arms! O
1   Nîlakantha cites numerous passages from works of the Yoga philosophy in illustration of this. He takes ‘heart’ to mean the
     Brahman seated in the heart (cf. Khândogya, p. 528), and ‘the seat of the heart’ to mean the one hundred and one passages of the heart. The latter expression Arguna Misra seems to render by ‘mind.’ See also generally on this passage, Maitri-upanishad, p. 133, and Yoga-sűtra III, 1 and 28 seq., and commentary there.
2   Literally, ‘those which are void of strength. I adopt Arguna Misra’s reading. The other reading literally means ‘obstructions.’
3   The self here means the body, I take it. See p. 248 supra.
4   The reply does not appear here. Nîlakantha says that the succeeding chapters contain it. Arguna Misra seems to say that the answer has been already given. The context here is obscure.

 253     CHAPTER IV, 51.

restrainer of your foes! according to what I had heard. As one placing any property in his store-room should fix his mind on the property 1, so placing one’s mind in one’s body, and keeping the passages confined, one should there look for the self and avoid heedlessness 2, Being thus always assiduous and pleased in the self, he attains in a short time to that Brahman, after perceiving which he understands the Pradhâna 3. He is not to be grasped by the eye, nor by any of the senses. Only by the mind used as a lamp is the great self perceived 4. He has hands and feet on all sides; he has eyes, heads, and faces on all sides; he has ears on all sides; he stands pervading everything in the worlds. The soul sees the self 6 come out from the body;’ and abandoning his body, he perceives the self,— holding it to be the immaculate Brahman,—with, as it were, a mental smile 7. And then depending upon it thus, he attains final emancipation in me 8,
1    Nîlakantha says the original means household effects; Arguna Misra says wealth, and adds, the mind is fixed on it from fear of
       others finding it out.
2   Cf. Sanatsugâtîya, p. 152. Here, however, the sense is the ordinary one.
3   I. e. all nature, that from which the universe is developed.
4   Cf. Katha, pp. I 17—130. See Sânti Parvan (Moksha) CCXL, 16.
5   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 103. The stanza occurs often in the Bhârata. This, says Arguna Misra, answers the question ‘how the soul carries the
       body.’ The soul can do that as it is all-pervading.
6   The individual soul, which has acquired true knowledge, perceives the self to be distinct from the body. See p. 249 supra.
7   I. e. at the false notions which he entertained.  Nîlakantha  says, ‘smile, i.e. amazement that he should have been deceived by the
      mirage-like course of worldly life.’
8    I.e. final emancipation and assimilation with the supreme; ‘depending upon it thus’ = taking refuge with the Brahman in the
       way above stated.

254     ANUGÎTÂ

This whole mystery I have declared to you, O best of Brâhmanas 1! I will now take my leave, I will go away; and do you too go away, O Brâhmana! according to your pleasure.’ Thus addressed by me, O Krishna! that pupil, possessed of great penance,
—that Brâhmana of rigid vows,—went away as he pleased.

Vásudeva said:

Having spoken to me, O son of Prithâ! these good words relating to the piety required for final emancipation, that best of Brâhmanas disappeared then and there. Have you listened to this, O son of Prithâ! with a mind fixed on this one point only 2 ?
For on that occasion, too, sitting in the chariot you heard this same instruction . It is my belief, O son of Prithâ! that this is not easily understood by a man who is confused, or who has not acquired knowledge with his inmost soul purified 3. What I have spoken, O chief of the descendants of Bharata! is a great mystery even among the gods. And it has never yet been heard by any man in this world, O son of Prithâ! For, O sinless one! there is no other man than you worthy to hear it. Nor is it easily to be understood by one whose internal self is confused. The world of the gods 4, O son of Kuntî! is filled by those who perform
1   Arguna Misra says, the only questions among those stated above, which are of use for final emancipation, have been here
      answered. The others should be looked for elsewhere.
2   The original words here are identical with those at Gîtâ, p.139.
3   I adopt Nîlakantha’s reading here. Arguna Misra reads ‘vigagdhena,’ which he explains to mean ‘one who eats kinds of
     food incompatible with one another.’ A third reading is ‘kritaghnena,’ ungrateful!
4   See Gîtâ, p. 84.

 255     CHAPTER IV, 66.

actions. And the gods are not pleased with a cessation of the mortal form 1. For as to that eternal Brahman, O son of Prithâ! that is the highest goal, where one, forsaking the body, reaches immortality and is ever happy. Adopting this doctrine, even those who are of sinful birth, women, Vaisyas, and Sűdras likewise, attain the supreme goal. What then need be said of Brâhmanas, O son of
Prithâ 2 or well-read Kshatriyas, who are constantly intent on their own duties, and whose highest goal is the world of the Brahman? This has been stated with reasons; and also the means for its acquisition; and the fruit of its full accomplishment, final emancipation, and determination regarding misery 3. O chief of the descendants of Bharata! there can be no other happiness beyond this. The mortal, O son of Pându! who, possessed of talents, full of faith, and energetic 4, casts aside as unsubstantial the whole substance of this world 5, he forthwith attains the highest goal by these means. This is all that is to be said, there is nothing further than this. Concentration of mind comes to him, O son of Prithâ who practises concentration of mind constantly throughout six months 6 .
1   Cf. Brihadâranyaka, p. 234, where Sańkara quotes the original stanza, but with a reading which means, ‘And the gods are not pleased at mortals rising above (them).’ That is a better reading.
2    See Gîtâ, pp. 85, 86, where the words are nearly identical with those in the text.
3   This is not quite clear. Does ‘determination regarding misery,’ the original of which is duhkhasya ka vinirnayah, mean
      ‘conclusion of all misery’? Comp. Gîtâ, p. 79.
4   Arguna Misra says this means assiduous.
5   I.e. wealth and so forth, says Nîlakantha. Cf. ‘human wealth’ at Sanatsugâtîya, p. 161.
6   Cf. Maitrî-upanishad, p. 154. The copy of Arguna Misra’s commentary which I have used, says that the Ânugîtâ ends here.
     But, as we have shown, there is a verse coming further on, which Sankarâkárya cites as from the Ânugîtâ. In the printed
     copies of the Mahâbhârata the next chapter is called the Brahmanagîtâ.

256     ANUGÎTÂ


On this 1, too, O chief of the descendants of Bharata! they relate this ancient story, in the form of a dialogue, which occurred,
O son of Prithâ! between a husband and wife. A Brâhmana’s wife, seeing the Brâhmana her husband, who had gone through all knowledge and experience 2, seated in seclusion, spoke to him thus : ‘What world, indeed, shall I go to, depending on you as my husband, you who live renouncing all action, and who are harsh and undiscerning 3. We have heard that wives attain to the worlds acquired by their husbands. What goal, verily, shall I reach, having got you for my husband?’ Thus addressed, that man of a tranquil self, spoke to her with a slight smile: ‘O beautiful one! O sinless one! I am not offended at these words of yours. Whatever action there is, that can be caught by the touch 4, or seen, or heard, that only do the men of action engage in as action. Those who are devoid of knowledge only lodge 5 delusion in themselves by means of action. And freedom from action is not to be attained in this world even for an
1   I. e. the questions at p. 252, Nîlakantha; more probably, perhaps, the ‘doctrine’ mentioned at p. 254 is what is alluded to.
2    Cf. Gîtâ, p. 57 and note.
3   Nîlakantha says this means ‘ignorant that the wife has no other support.’ Arguna Misra interprets kînâsa to mean indigent’
     instead of ‘harsh.’
4   So Arguna Misra. Nîlakantha’s reading and his interpretation of the passage are different.
5   I follow Arguna Misra; the original literally means ‘restrain.’

 257     CHAPTER V, 12.

instant 1. From birth to the destruction of the body, action, good or bad, by act, mind or speech 2, does exist among all beings.
While the paths 3 of action, in which the materials are visible, are destroyed by demons 4, I have perceived by means of the self the seat abiding in the self 5— the seat where dwells the Brahman free from the pairs of opposites, and the moon together with the fire 6, upholding all beings as the mover of the intellectual principle 7; the seat for which 8 Brahman and others concentrating their minds worship that indestructible principle, and for which learned men have their senses restrained, and their selfs tranquil, and observe good vows. It is not to be smelt by the nose, and not to be tasted by the tongue. It is not to be touched by the sense of touch, but is to be apprehended by the mind. It cannot be
1   Cf. Gîtâ, pp. 52, 53 see also, as to freedom from action, Gîtâ,p. 227.
2    I. e. thought, word, and deed. I have in the text kept to a more literal rendering.
3   This is Nîlakantha’s reading and interpretation. Arguna Misra reads ‘actions visible and invisible.’
4   Cf. inter alia Kumâra-sambhava II, 46.
5   I. e. says Arguna Misra, the safe place, within the body; and says Nîlakantha, the seat called Avimukta, between the nose and
     he brows; as to which cf. Gîtâ, p. 67. In the Kenopanishad (p. 220) the word âyatana is used to signify a means to the attainment
     of the Brahman. [See: Secret Doctrine, vol 2, p. 495,6. for more. Wizi ]
6   The moon and fire constitute the universe, says Arguna Misra. Cf. Gîtâ, p. ii 3. Nîlakantha interprets this more mystically as
      referring to the Idâ and Pingalâ arteries.
7   So Nîlakantha, but he takes it to stand for ‘vâyu’ or wind, as a distinct principle. The sense is by no .means clear. But the moon
      being the deity of the mind also may, perhaps, be described as she is here, on that account.
8   This is Arguna Misra’s interpretation of the original locative.

258     ANUGÎTÂ

conquered by the eyes, and is entirely beyond the senses of hearing. It is devoid of smell, devoid of taste and touch, devoid of colour and sound, and imperishable 1. It is that from which this whole expanse 2 of the universe proceeds, and on which it rests. From this the Prâna, Apâna, Samâna, Vyâna, and Udâna also proceed, and into it they enter 3 . Between the Samâna and the Vyâna, the Prâna and the Apâna moved. When that 4 is asleep, the Samâna and Vyâna also are absorbed 5 and between the Prâna and the Apâna dwells the Udâna pervading all. Therefore the Prâna and the Apâna do not forsake a sleeping person. That is called the Udâna, as the life-winds are controlled 6 by it. And therefore those who study the Brahman engage in penance 7 of which I am the goal 8 In
1   Cf. note 4., p. 247 supra, and p. 253.
2   Arguna Misra says this means the five great elements, the eleven organs (active and perceptive, and the mind), the life-wind,
      and the individual soul.
3   The Prâna is at the nose, the Apâna at the arms, the Samâna at the navel, the Vyâna pervades the whole body, and the Udâna
      is at all the joints; cf. Yoga-sűtra III, 38 seq. Nîlakantha says this explains how the ‘expanse’ (meaning, he says, the operations of
      the creation, &c.) ‘proceeds’ from the Brahman. See on the life-winds, Brîhadâranyaka, p. 667; Khândogya, pp. 42—188;
     Sâńkhyatattvakaumudî, p. 96; Vedânta Paribhâshâ, p.4 p. 271 infra.
4   The self, Arguna Misra. Nîlakantha says, ‘the Prâna accompanied by the Apâna.’
5   I. e. into the Prâna and Apâna, Arguna Misra.
6    Nîlakantha derives the word thus, utkarshena ânayati.
7   I.e. the subjugation of the life-winds as indicated at Gîtâ, p. 61.
8    The meaning of the passage as a whole is not very clear, and the commentators afford but little help. The sense appears to be
      this: The course of worldly life is due to the operations of the life-winds which are attached to the self and lead to its
      manifestations as individual souls. Of these, the Samâna and Vyâna are controlled and held under check by the Prâna and
      Apâna, into which latter the former are absorbed in sleep. The latter two are held in check and controlled by the Udâna, which
       thus controls all. And the control of this, which is the control of all the five, and which is otherwise called penance, destroys the
       course of worldly life, and leads to the supreme self.
[See: Secret Doctrine vol 2, p567-569, and 628 for further explanations on these passages. Wizi ]

 259     CHAPTER V, 21.

the interior 1, in the midst of all these life-winds which move about in the body and swallow up one another 2, blazes the Vaisvâna
fire 3 sevenfold. The nose, and the tongue, and the eye, and the skin, and the ear as the fifth, the mind and the understanding, these are the seven tongues 4 of the blaze of Vaisvânara. That which is to be smelt, that which is to be drunk, that which is to be seen, that which is to be touched, and likewise that which is to be heard, and also that which is to be thought of, and that which is to be understood, those are the seven kinds of fuel for me 5. That which smells, that which eats, that which sees, that which touches, and that which hears as the fifth, that which thinks, and that which understands, these are the seven great officiating priests 6. And mark this always,
1   I. e. within the body.
2   As explained in note 8, p. 258.
3   This, says Nîlakantha, explains the word ‘I’ in the sentence preceding. Vaisvânara is a word often used to denote the self. The
      Vishamaslokî derives it thus, ‘that which saves all beings from hell;’ see the Prasna-upanishad, pp. 167—188 (where seven
      tongues are also referred to); Mundaka, p. 292; Khândogya, p. 364; Mândukya, p. 341.
4   Cf. TaittirIya-âranyaka, p. 802.
5   I. e. the Vaisvânara. Cf. Taittirîya-âranyaka, p. 803 and gloss.
6    These I take to be the powers of hearing, &c., which are presided over by the several deities; or, better, perhaps, they may mean
      the soul distinguished as so many with reference to these several powers; cf. Brihadâranyaka, p. 169; Maitrî, p. 96; Prasna, pp.
      214, 215; Kaushîtaki, p. 96; Aitareya, p. 187; Khândogya p. 616. The latter sense is accepted by Arguna Misra.

260     ANUGÎTÂ

O beautiful one! The learned sacrificers throwing (in) due form the seven offerings into the seven fires in seven ways, produce them in their wombs 1; namely , that which is to be smelt, that which is to be drunk, that which is to be seen, that which is to be touched, and likewise that which is to be heard, that which is to be thought of, and also that which is to be understood. Earth, air, space, water, and light as the fifth, mind and understanding, these seven, indeed, are named wombs. All the qualities which stand 2 as offerings are absorbed in the mouth of the fire 3 and having dwelt within that dwelling are born in their respective wombs 4. And in that very principle , which is the generator of all entities, they remain absorbed during the time of deluge. From that 5 is produced smell; from that is produced taste ; from that is produced colour; from that touch is produced; from that is produced sound; from that doubt 6 is produced; from that is produced determination. This is what they know as the sevenfold production. In this very way was it 7 comprehended by the ancients. Becoming perfected by the perfect sacrifice 8, they were perfectly filled with light.’
1   The next clause explains this; that which is to be smelt is earth, and so on throughout. The men who sacrifice all sensuous
       objects, get such powers that they can create the objects whenever they like. As to ‘in their wombs,’ see Yoga Bhâshya, p. 108.
2    I. e. are so treated in the above allegory.
3    I. e. the Brahman.
4    I.e. when the sacrificer wishes, as stated in note 1.
5    That principle—viz, the Brahman.
6    This is the operation of the mind, see Gîtâ, p. 57 note.
7    The Brahman, Arguna Misra. Or it may be the ‘sevenfold production.’
8    The wholesale sacrifice of all sensuous perceptions. The root corresponding with perfect occurs three times in the original,
       hence the repetition of perfect above.

 261     CHAPTER VI, 6.


The Brâhmana said:

On this, too, they relate this ancient story. Learn now of what description is the institution of the ten sacrificial priests 1. The ear 2, the skin, the two eyes, the tongue, the nose, the two feet, the two hands, speech, the genital organ, and the anus, these, verily, are ten sacrificial priests, O beautiful one! Sound, touch, colour, and taste, smell, words, action, motion, and the discharge of semen, urine, and excrement, these are the ten oblations. The quarters, wind, sun, moon, earth and fire, and Vishnu also, Indra, Pragâpati, and Mitra, these, O beautiful one! are the ten fires 3. The ten organs are the makers of the offering; the offerings are ten, O beautiful one! Objects of sense, verily, are the fuel; and they are offered up into the ten fires. The mind is the ladle 4; and the wealth is the pure, highest knowledge 5. Thus we have heard, was the universe duly divided 6 And the mind, which is the instru-
1    Cf. Taittirîyahrâhmana, p. 411, and Âranyaka, p. 281.
2   Cf. Brihadâranyaka, p. 49. The reading in the printed edition of Bombay is defective here.
3   See p. 337 seq., where all this is more fully explained. And cf. the analogous Buddhistic doctrine stated at Lalita Vistara
     (Translation by Dr. R. Mitra), p. 11.
4    See Taittiriya-âranyaka loc. cit., and cf. Gîtâ, p. 61 ‘The wealth’ probably means the Dakshinâ to be given to the priests, which
      is mentioned at Gîtâ, p. 119.
5   The ‘priests’ here being the senses, the knowledge would accrue to them, as to which cf. Gîtâ, p. 108.
6   See note 3.

262     ANUGÎTÂ.

ment of knowledge, requires everything knowable 1 as its offering. The mind is within the body the upholder of the frame, and the knower is the upholder of the body 2 That 3 upholder of the body is the Gârhapatya fire; from that another is produced, and the mind which is the Âhavanîya; and into this the offering is thrown. Then the lord of speech was produced 4; that lord of speech looks up to the mind. First, verily, are words produced; and the mind runs after them.
1   Each sense can only offer up its own perceptions—the mind offers up all knowledge whatever.
2    Arguna Misra says this is an implied simile, the mind is an upholder of the body as the ‘knower’ or self is.
3   Arguna Misra says this means ‘the mind.’ I think it better to take it here as the self (see p. 238 supra), to which the ‘mind’
     and the ‘other,’ mentioned further on, would be subordinate; the ‘other’ Arguna Misra renders by the ‘group of the senses.’
     The senses are compared to fires at Gîtâ, p. 61. The passage at Taittirîya-âranyaka above cited refers only to the Gârhapatya
     and Âhavanîya fires. Nîlakantha’s text and explanation of this passage are, to my mind, not nearly so satisfactory as
     Arguna Misra’s.
4   In the Taittirîya-brâhmana and Aranyaka loc. cit., the equivalent of the original word for ‘lord of speech’ here occurs, viz.
     Vâkpati for Vâkaspati here; but that is there described as the Hotri priest, and speech itself as the Vedî or altar. The
     commentator there interprets ‘lord of speech’ to mean the wind which causes vocal activity, and resides in the throat, palate,
     &c. As to mind and speech, see also Khândogya, pp. 285—441, and comments of Sańkara there. The meaning of this passage,
      however, is not by any means clear to my mind. The Dasahotri mantras in the Taittirîya are stated to be the mantras of the
      Ishti, or sacrifice, performed by Pragâpati for creation. It is possible, then, that the meaning here is, that speech which is to be
      learnt by the pupil, as stated further on—namely, the Vedas—was first produced from that Ishti (cf. Kullűka on Manu I, 21).
      But to understand that speech, mind is necessary; hence it is said to look up to the mind. The Brâhmana’s wife, however, seems
      to understand speech as ordinary speech, hence her question.

 263    CHAPTER VI, 15.
The Brâhmana’s wife said:

How did speech come into existence first, and how did the mind come into existence afterwards, seeing that words are uttered after they have been thought over by the mind? By means of what experience does intelligence come to the mind, and though developed, does not comprehend 1? What verily obstructs it?

The Brâhmana said:

The Apâna becoming lord changes it into the state of the Apâna in consequence. That is called the movement of the mind, and hence the mind is in need of it 2 But since you ask me a question regarding speech and mind, I will relate to you a dialogue between themselves. Both speech and mind went to the self of all beings 3 and spoke to him thus , ‘Say which of us is superior; destroy our doubts, O lord!’ Thereupon the lord positively said to speech, ‘Mind is superior .‘ But speech thereupon said to him, ‘I, verily yield you your desires 4.‘
1   This, again, is to my mind very hard to understand. The original word for ‘intelligence’ is mati, which at Khândogya,
     p. 514, Sańkara interprets thus: ‘intelligence is pondering, application to (literally, respect for) the subject of thought.’
     The original for ‘developed,’ Arguna Misra renders by ‘ mixed or assimilated with;’ and ‘does not comprehend,’ he takes
     to mean ‘does not understand—speech or words.’ This question appears to be suggested by the last words of the previous speech.
2   These two sentences are again very obscure. Nîlakantha, as usual, deserts his original, giving peculiar meanings to the words
      without producing any authority. Arguna Misra is very meagre, and besides the MS. is very incorrect. See p. 264, note 5 infra.
3   I. e. Pragâpati, says Arguna Misra, which seems to be justified by the sequel. Nîlakantha takes it to mean the individual self,
     which doubtless is its meaning elsewhere, e.g. Maitrî, p. 56.
4   I. e. speech conveys information on all matters, Arguna Misra; as the means of acquiring desired fruit, visible or invisible,
    is learnt by speech, Nîlakantha. Cf. as to all this, Brîhadâranyaka upanishad, pp. 50 seq. and 261.
[ The next several pages are quoted and elucidated at length in the Secret Doctrine, vol 1, p94-96. Wizi ]

264     ANUGÎTÂ.

The Brâhmana 1 said:

Know, that in my view, there are two minds 2, immovable and also movable. The immovable, verily, is with me; the movable is in your dominion. Whatever mantra, or letter, or tone goes to your dominion, that indeed is the movable mind 3. To that you are superior. But inasmuch, O beautiful one! as you came personally to speak to me (in the way you did) 4, therefore, O Sarasvati! you shall never speak after hard exhalations 5. The goddess speech, verily, dwelt always between the Prâna and Apâna 6. But, O noble one, going with the Apâna
1  I.e. Nîlakantha says, ‘the Brâhmana named mind,’ alluding apparently to p. 310 infra. But the reading of some of the MSS., viz.
     Brahman for the Brâhmana, seems preferable, having regard to what follows. Apparently, the Brâhmana’s own speech should
     begin at ‘The goddess speech’ further on.
2   Nîlakantha says, immovable=to be understood by the external senses; movable =not perceptible by senses, such as heaven, &c.,
     which is not quite intelligible. Arguna Mirra says, the immovable mind is that of the teacher, which is fixed, as it has not to learn
     or acquire anything, while that of the pupil is movable as acquiring new impressions and knowledge.
3  I. e. it is the movable mind which takes cognisance of the significations of all mantras (sacred texts), letters, tones, in which, I
    presume, sacred instruction is conveyed. To this mind, speech is superior, as that mind only works on what speech places
    before it; but the mind which is ‘with’ Pragâpati, is superior to speech as it is not dependent on speech like the other.
4  I.e. proudly, about her being the giver of desires to Brahman.
5  I. e., says Arguna Misra, the words will not come out with the Prâna life-wind and convey any sense to the hearer, but will be
     absorbed down into the Apâna life-wind, and not be articulated as speech at all. Cf. Kaushîtaki, p. 41 ; Katha, p. 284 (with
     glosses); and Khândogya, p. 42.
6  I.e., I presume, was dependent on the two life-winds named.

 265     CHAPTER VI, 25.

wind 1, though impelled, in consequence of being without the Prâna, she ran up to Pragâpati, saying, ‘Be pleased 2, O venerable sir!’ Then the Prâna 3 appeared again nourishing speech. And therefore speech never speaks after hard exhalation. It is always noisy or noiseless. Of those two, the noiseless is superior to the noisy 4 speech . This excellent speech , like a cow, yields milk 5, and speaking of the Brahman it always produces the eternal emancipation. This cow-like speech, O you of a bright smile, is divine, with divine 6 power. Observe the difference of its two subtle, flowing forms 7.

The Brâhmana’s wife said:

What did the goddess of speech say on that occasion in days of old, when, though she was impelled with a desire to speak, words could not be uttered?

The Bráhmana said:

The speech which is produced in the body by
Cf. p. 353 infra. For this sense of the word ‘between,’ see p. 258 supra, and Khândogya-upanishad, p. 623.
1   And not with the Prâna, so as to be articulated. Cf. p. 264.
2   I. e. to withdraw the ‘curse’ pronounced, as above stated.
3   After the curse was withdrawn, says Arguna Misra. Cf. Brihadâranyaka, p. 317.
4  Since, says Arguna Misra, noiseless speech is the source of all words—Vâńmaya. Perhaps we may compare Aitareya-brâhmana (Haug), p. 47.
5  Viz. Vâńmaya; milk, as a source of pleasure.
6   I e. enlightening, Arguna Misra. But, perhaps, the translation should be, ‘has powers divine and not divine.’ As to this, cf.
     Sâńkhya Bhâshya on III, r, and Sânkhyatattvakaumudî, p. 118, and Wilson’s Sânkhya Kârikâ, p. 37 (Sanskrit), and
     Svetâsvatara, p. 284 (gloss).
7  Arguna Misra refers to a ‘Satapatha text’ in praise of the subtle speech. I cannot trace the text. But see Nirukta (Roth), pp. 167—187.


means of the Prâna 1, and which then goes into the Apâna, and then becoming assimilated with the Udâna leaves the body 2, and with the Vyâna envelopes all the quarters 3, then finally dwells in the Samâna 4. So speech formerly spoke. Hence the mind is distinguished by reason of its being immovable, and the goddess distinguished by reason of her being movable 5.


The Brâhmana said:

On this, too, O beautiful one! they relate this ancient story, which shows of what description is the institution of the seven sacrificial priests 6 The
1   Cf. Khândogya, p. 285, and the passage there quoted by Sańkara as well as Ânandagiri’s gloss. And see, too, p. 353 infra.
2   Viz, the part of it which specially appertains to speech—the throat, &c.
3   All the -nâdîs or passages of the body, Arguna Misra.
4   I. e. at the navel in the form of sound, as the material cause of all words. There and in that condition speech dwells, after going
      through the body, as above stated. There, adds Arguna Misra, devotees are to meditate on speech.
5   This is not quite clear, but the meaning seems to be, that the merit of the immovable mind consists in its unchangeability, and
     that of speech in being the cause of variations in the movable mind by conveying new knowledge and new impressions. Cf. on
      this result, Khândogya-upanishad, p. 482.
6    Arguna Misra says, the last chapter explained Prânâyâma, and this explains Pratyâhâra. Prânâyâma is the restraint of the
      life-winds, Pratyâhâra that of the senses, according to the Yoga philosophy (see the quotation in the commentary at Yoga-sűtra
       III, 1, and see also pp. 141—145). Cf. also Gîtâ, p. 61. The Sapta-hotri-vidhâna as taught in the Taittirîya-brâhmana and
      Âranyaka is to be found a few pages after the pages referred to for the Dasahotri-vidhâna at p. 261 supra. And the other
       Vidhânas also are to be found in the same parts of those books.

267     CHAPTER VII, 12.

nose, and the eye, and the tongue, and the skin, and the ear as the fifth, mind and understanding, these are the seven sacrificial priests separately stationed. Dwelling in a minute space, they do not perceive each other. Do you, verily, O beautiful one! learn about these sacrificial priests, which are seven according to their several natures.

The Brâhmana’s wife said:

How is it these do not perceive each other, dwelling as they do in a minute space? What are their natures, O venerable sir? Tell me this, O lord!

The Brâhmana said:

Not knowing the qualities of anything is ignorance of it . Knowledge of the qualities is knowledge. And these never know the qualities of each other. The tongue, the eye, the ear likewise, the skin, the mind, and the understanding also, do not apprehend smells, the nose apprehends them. The nose, the eye, the ear likewise, the skin, the mind, and the understanding also, do not apprehend tastes, the tongue apprehends them. The nose, the tongue, the ear likewise, the skin, the mind, and the understanding also, do not apprehend colours, the eye apprehends them. The nose, the tongue, and next the eye, the ear, the understanding, the mind likewise, do not apprehend objects of touch, the skin apprehends them. The nose, the tongue, and the eye, the skin, the mind, and the understanding also, do not apprehend sounds, the ear apprehends them. The nose, the tongue, and the eye, the skin, the ear, and the understanding also, do not apprehend doubt, the mind apprehends it. The nose, the tongue, and the eye, the skin, the ear, and the mind

268     ANUGÎTÂ.

also, do not apprehend final determination, the understanding apprehends it. On this, too, they relate this ancient story,—a dialogue, O beautiful one! between the senses and the mind.

The mind said:

The nose smells not without me, the tongue does not perceive taste, the eye does not take in colour, the skin does not become aware of any object of touch. Without me, the ear does not in any way hear sound. I am the eternal chief among all elements 1. Without me, the senses never shine, like an empty dwelling, or like fires the flames of which are extinct. Without me, all beings, like fuel half dried and half moist, fail to apprehend qualities or objects, even with the senses exerting themselves 2.

The senses said:

This would be true as you believe, if you, without us, enjoyed the enjoyments derived from our objects 3. If when we are extinct, there is pleasure and support of life, and if you enjoy enjoyments, then what you believe is true ; or if when we are absorbed 4 and objects are standing, you enjoy objects according to their natures by the mere operation of the mind.
1   Cf. Kaushîtaki-upanishad, p. 93; Khândogya, p. 297; Maitrî, p.158 and Brihadâranyaka, p. 284. The passages in the last two
     works seem to be identical ones.
2   I. e. in their respective operations.
3   The implication, of course, is, as Arguna Misra says, that this is not so, as what is not perceived by the senses cannot be the
      object of the mind’s operations,—a proposition which reminds one of the maxim, ‘Nihil est in intellectu quod non fuerit in sensu,’
      apparently without Leibnitz’s limitation of it. Cf. Archbishop Thomson’s Laws of’ Thought, p. 52.
4   As in asleep, &c.

269     CHAPTER VII, 27.

If again you think your power over our objects is constant 1, then take in colours by the nose, take in tastes by the eye, take in smells by the ear, take in objects of touch by the tongue, and take in sounds by the skin, and also objects of 2 touch by the understanding. For those who are powerful have no rules to govern them ; rules are for the weak. You should accept enjoyments unenjoyed before; you ought not to enjoy what has been tasted 3 by others. As a pupil goes to a preceptor for Vedic learning, and having acquired Vedic learning from him, performs the directions of the Vedic texts, so you treat as yours 4 objects shown 5 by us, both past and future 6, in sleep and likewise wakefulness. Besides, when creatures of little intelligence are distracted in mind, life is seen to be supported, when our objects 7 perform their functions. And even after having carried on numerous mental operations, and indulged in dreams, a creature, when troubled by desire to enjoy, does run to objects of sense only. One entering upon enjoyments, resulting from mental operations alone , and not connected with objects
1   I.e. if you can enjoy objects independently of the senses, whenever you choose to perform your operations. This, says Arguna
     Misra, meets an objection which might be made, that the mind at the time stated does not desire objects.
2   Sic in original. It comes twice,
3   Eating what has been tasted by another is a cause of degradation. Cf. Khândogya, p. 81; Maitrî, p. 103; and p. 363 infra.
4   You incorrectly attribute to yourself the quality of apprehending them.
5   I. e. presented before you by us.
6   This is not quite clear. Arguna Misra has, ‘not past, not future;’ literally, ‘not come, not gone.’
7   Viz. smell, sound, &c.; not by the mere operations of the mind, but by obtaining the objects, is life supported.

270    ANUGÎTÂ.

of sense, which is like entering a house without a door 1, always meets death, on the exhaustion of the life-winds 2, as a fire which is kindled is extinguished on the exhaustion of fuel. Granted, that we have connexions with our respective qualities, and granted that we have no perception of each other’s qualities; still, without us, you have no perception 3, and so long no happiness can accrue to you.


The Brâhmana said:

On this, too, they relate an ancient story, O beautiful one! showing of what description is the institution of the five sacrificial priests. The learned know this to be a great principle, that the Prâna and the Apâna, and the Udâna, and also the Samâna and the Vyâna, are the five sacrificial priests.

The Brâhmana’s wife said:

My former belief was that the sacrificial priests were seven by their nature 4. State how the great principle is that there are verily five sacrificial priests 5.
1   The senses are the doors of the house here, as they are among the doors of the city at Gîtâ, p. 65.
2   Owing to the want of food, &c. Cf. Maitrî, p. 112, and Khândogya, p. 422.
3   Perception of pleasure, says Arguna Misra; but he takes the subsequent clause to mean this, ‘and without you no pleasure
      accrues to us either.’ The text is here in an unsatisfactory state.
4   As stated in the last chapter; some MSS. read ‘your’ for ‘my’ at the beginning of the sentence.
5    Arguna Misra says that in this Pankahotri-vidhâna the five chief Hotris only are stated for briefly explaining the Prânâyâma.

 271     CHAPTER VIII, 7.

The Brâhmana said:

The wind prepared by the Prâna afterwards becomes the Apana. The wind prepared in the Apâna then works as the Vyâna. The wind prepared by the Vyâna works as the Udâna. And the wind prepared in the Udâna is produced as Samâna1. They formerly went to the grandsire, who was born first, and said to him, ‘Tell us which is greatest among us. He shall be the greatest among us 2.

Brahman said :

He, verily, is the greatest, who being extinct, all the life-winds in the body of living creatures become extinct; and on whose moving about, they again move about. Now go where you like.

The Prâna said:

When I am extinct, all the life-winds in the body
1  Arguna Misra says, ‘The wind going to the Prâna, and being obstructed in upward progress by the Prâna, goes to the Apâna, and
     then unable to go upwards or downwards, enters the passages or nâdîs of the body and becomes Vyâna. In the same way Udâna,
     by the collision of the two, produces sound in the throat, and depends on Prâna and Apâna; so, too, the Samâna dwelling in the
     navel and kindling the gastric fire is also dependent on those two.’ The meaning seems to be that one life-wind is distributed in
     the different places, and gets different names, as stated, in the order mentioned. See Maitrî, p. 28.
2   A similar visit on the part of the Prânas (who, however, are not there the life-winds only, but the Prâna life-wind and the active
      organs) to Pragâpati is mentioned at Brihadâranyaka-upanishad, p. 1016, and Khândogya, p. 297. Cf. also Prasna, p. 178;
      Brihadâranyaka, p. 327; and Kaushîaki, p. 63. See also, generally, as to the life-winds and their functions, Brihadâranyaka, p. 280, and
      Sańkara’s comment there; Yoga-sűtras III, 38, and comment; Cowell’s note at Maitrî, p. 247; Sânti Parvan (Moksha Dharma), chap. 184,
      st. 24—25; chap. 185, st.i seq.; and p. 258 supra.

272     ANUGÎTÂ

of living creatures become extinct; and on my moving about, they again move about. I am the greatest. See I am extinct.

The Brâhmana said:

Then the Prâna became extinct, and again moved about. Then the Samâna and Udâna also 1, O beautiful one! spoke these words, ‘You do not pervade all this here as we do. You are not the greatest among us, O Prâna, because the Apâna is subject to you 2.‘ The Prâna again moved about 3, and the Apâna 4 said to him.

The Apâna said:

When I am extinct, all the life-winds in the body of living creatures become extinct; and on my moving about, they again move about. I am the greatest. See I am extinct!

The Bráhmana said:

Then the Vyâna and the Udâna addressed him who was speaking thus : ‘You are not the greatest, O Apâna! because the Prâna is subject to you.’ Then the Apâna moved about, and the Vyâna spoke to him: ‘I am the greatest among you all. Hear the reason why. When I am extinct, all the life-winds in the body of living creatures become extinct.
1   Arguna Misra says, Vyâna and Apâna also by force of the two ‘ands’ which occur in the original; and so in other places too.
2   Arguna Misra says on this, ‘The Prâna moves upwards through the help of the Apâna. If it moved downwards, it would be
     simply absorbed into the Apâna.’
3   I.e. recommenced its proper operation in its proper place.
4   And the ether life-winds also, Arguna Misra says, the name Prâna being merely ‘indicative,’ as the phrase is, of the class to which it belongs.

 273     CHAPTER VIII, 21.

And on my moving about, they again move about. I am the greatest. See I am extinct!’

The Brâhmana said:

Then the Vyâna became extinct, and again moved about. And the Prâna and Apâna, and the Udâna, and the Samâna, spoke to him, ‘You are not the greatest among us, O Vyâna! because the Samâna 1 is subject to you.’ The Vyâna moved about again, and the Samâna spoke again. ‘I am the greatest among you all. Hear the reason why. When I am extinct, all the life-winds in the body of living creatures become extinct; and on my moving about, they again move about. I am the greatest. See I am extinct!’ Then the Samâna moved about, and the Udâna said to him; ‘I am the greatest among you all. Hear the reason why. When I am extinct, all the life-winds in the body of living creatures become extinct; and on my moving about, they again move about. I am the greatest. See I am extinct!’ Then the Udâna became extinct, and again moved about. And the Prâna and Apâna, and the Samána, and the Vyâna also, spoke to him: ‘O Udâna! you are not the greatest. The Vyâna 2 only is subject to you.’

The Brâhmana said:

Then Brahman, the lord of all creatures, said to them who were assembled together: ‘You are all greatest, and not greatest 3. You are all possessed
1   Because the Samâna helps in the digestion of the food which afterwards goes to the Vyâna for distribution through the nâdîs.
2    Because the Udâna is able to generate sound after the nâdîs are filled up by the Vyâna.
3   ‘Not greatest’ because none of them is independent of the other. ‘Greatest’ Arguna Misra renders by ‘superior to objects.’
      (See: Secret Doctrine, vol. 1, p96 for more. Wizi )

274     ANUGÎTÂ.

of one another’s qualities 1. All are greatest in their own spheres, and all support one another. There is one unmoving 2 life-wind . There are others moving about, which are five, owing to their specific qualities. My own self is one only 3, but accumulated in numerous forms. Being friendly with one another, and pleasing one another, go away happily. Welfare be to you ! Support one another.’


The Brâhmana said:

On this, too, they relate this ancient story, a dialogue between Nârada and the sage Devamata.

Devamata said:

When a creature is about to be born, what comes into existence first, his Prâna, or Apâna, or Samâna, or Vyâna, or else Udâna?

Nârada said:

By whichever the creature is produced, that which is other than this first comes to him. And the pairs of the life-winds should be understood, which (move) upwards, or downwards, or transversely.
1   This is not quite clear. I presume it means that each one has the generic qualities which make the others great in their own
      spheres; but the specific qualities are different.
2   The one life-wind is supposed here to be generally unmoving, but its distribution among the different parts of the body as
       specified, for instance, in the commentary on the Yoga-sűtra III, 38, gives it the different names. The expression does not
      seem to be quite accurate for this, which nevertheless seems to be the true, sense.
3   Another reading is, ‘That one is my own self.’ Cf. Maitrî, pp. 28 seq., 105, and Brihadâranyaka, p. 269.

 275      CHAPTER IX, 9,

Devamata said:

By which of the life-winds is a creature produced? and which of them first comes to him? Explain to me also the pairs of the life-winds, which move upwards, or downwards, or transversely.

Nârada said:

Pleasure is produced from a mental operation 1, and it is also produced from a sound, it is also produced from taste, and it is also produced from colour, and it is also produced from touch, and it is also produced from smell. This is the effect 2 of the Udâna; the pleasure is produced from union 3. From desire the semen is produced; and from the semen is produced menstrual excretion. The semen and the blood are produced by the Samâna and the Vyâna in common 4. From the combination of the semen and the blood, the Prâna comes first into operation; and the semen being developed by the Prâna, the Apâna then comes into operation. The pair Prâna and Apâna go upwards and downwards, and the Samâna and Vyâna are called the pair moving transversely. It is the teaching of the
1   I.e. desire. ‘Sound ‘=recollection of a woman’s voice; ‘taste,’ scil. of chastity; ‘colour’ =the beauty of a woman, Arguna Misra.
     Cf. Âpastamba I, 2, 7, 8, and Lalita Vistara, p. 19.
2   Literally, ‘form,’ which Arguna Misra interprets to mean effect, and adds, ‘The Udâna causes mental activity, and by mental
      activity sound &c. are apprehended.’
3   I. e. of Udâna and mind, Arguna Misra; adding, ‘the result is that a creature is produced by the Udâna.’
4   Or, perhaps, generally, that is to say, the store of them, the specific semen being produced from desire, as before stated. The
      Samâna’s function is the digestion of food, and that of the Vyâna is the distribution of the digested food to the whole body
      through the nâdîs, hence the proposition in the text.


276     ANUGÎTÂ.

Veda, that the fire verily is all the deities 1, and knowledge of it arises among Brâhmanas, being accompanied by intelligence 2. The smoke of that fire , which is of excellent glory, appears in the shape of the quality of darkness; its ashes, the quality of passion; and the quality of goodness is that in connexion with it 3, in which the offering is thrown. Those who understand the sacrifice understand the Samâna and the Vyâna as the principal offering. The Prâna and Apâna are portions 4 of the offering of clarified butter, and between them is the fire. That is the excellent seat of the Udâna as understood by Brâhmanas 5. As to that which is distinct from these pairs 6, hear me speak about
1   Cf. inter alia, Aitareya-brâhmana (Haug’s ed.), p. i. (See: Secret Doctrine vol 1, p101, for further explanations. Wizi )
2   Arguna Misra says intelligence means ‘discussion, or argument.’ The connexion of this with what has gone before,
     according to Arguna Misra, is this, that the author having first stated the five Hotris fully, now explains in what the Prâna
     and Apâna are to be offered up for acquiring the Prânâyama. The fire he takes to mean the self. Cf. what has been said
     about Vaisvânara above, p. 259.
3   That is to say, the flame, I take it. He is drawing out here the figure of the fire.
4   These are only a subordinate part of the offering, called Âgyabhâgas. They are called subordinate, I suppose, as the operations
     of the Samâna and Vyâna are more practically important for vitality. The fire is the self. The place of the principal offering is
     between the Âgyabhâgas, as stated by Arguna Misra.
5   The Udâna is here treated as the life-wind into which the others are to be offered up. See p. 258, and note 8 there.
6 The next three sentences seem to indicate what is to be destroyed in common with the life-winds. One has to get rid of all
    notions about day and night, good and evil, existence and nonexistence, and then final emancipation is reached. The fire,
    which is common to all the passages, stands for the self; into that apparently all the ideas of time, and good and evil, and
    so forth, are to be offered as the life-winds are; and that fire stands in the place of the
Udâna, for this purpose, as into the
    last all the other life-winds
have to be offered. As to that which exists, &c., cf. Gîtâ, p. 103, and p. 370, note 9 infra. As to good
    and evil and generally, cf. Khândogya, p. 6o; Kaushîtaki, p. 19. They are nothing to one who knows the Brabman. Day and night Arguna Misra takes to mean the Ida and Pingalâ nâdis, between which is the Sushumnâ, as they are connected with the sun and moon. But the sense of the whole passage is far from clear.

 277     CHAPTER X, 2.

that. Day and night are a pair, between them is the fire. That is the excellent seat of the Udâna as understood by Brâhmanas. That which exists and that which does not exist are a pair, between them is the fire. That is the excellent seat of the Udâna as understood by Brâhmanas. The two—good and evil—are a pair, between them is the fire. That is the excellent seat of the Udâna as understood by Brâhmanas. First 1, the Samâna and Vyâna, their function 2 is performed: then, secondly, the Samâna comes into operation again. Then the Vâmadevya 3 for tranquillity, and tranquillity is the eternal Brahman. This is the excellent seat of the Udâna as understood by Bráhmanas.


On this, too, they relate an ancient story showing of what nature is the institution of the Kâturhotra 4. The due performance of it
in its entirety is now taught. Hear me, O good woman! state this won-
1   Arguna Mirra understands these to be three Savanas.
2   Of taking into the nâdîs the food digested in the night, this is the morning Savana; the afternoon Savana is the kindling of
     the gastric fire for digesting new food.
3   The Vâmadevya is a sűkta beginning ‘Kayâ nas kitrâ’ (Rv. IV, 31, i). The singing of it is the third Savana, Arguna Misra.
     And see Taittirîya-âranyaka, p. 889.
4   Cf. Aitareya-brâhmana (Haug), pp. 132, 133.
     [See: Secret Doctrine vol. 1, p534. 535, where this passage is quoted. Wiz]


278     ANUGÎTÂ.

derful mystery. The instrument, the action, the agent, and emancipation 1, these, indeed, O you of a pure heart ! are the four Hotris by whom this universe is enveloped. Hear also the assignment of causes exhaustively 2 The nose, and the tongue, and the eye, and the skin, and the ear as the fifth, mind and understanding, these seven should be understood to be the causes of the knowledge of 3 qualities. Smell, and taste, and colour, sound, and touch as the fifth, the object of the mental operation and the object of the understanding 4, these seven are causes of action, He who smells, he who eats, he who sees, he who speaks, and he who hears as the fifth, he who thinks, and he who understands, these seven should be understood to be the causes of the agents 5. These 6, being possessed of qualities 7, enjoy their own qualities, agreeable and disagreeable. And I am here devoid of qualities. Thus these seven are the causes of emancipation 8 And among the learned who understand everything , the
1   Cf. as to the three first, Gîtâ, p. 123. They are the four categories, to one or other of which everything in the world may
       be referred.
2   The texts here differ. Arguna Misra’s reading he interprets to mean ‘the subjugation of these Hotris.’ The reading followed in
      the text seems to some extent to be supported by the sequel. But the passage altogether is not very clear.
3   So Arguna Misra—through these the knowledge of the qualities of objects of sense is acquired.
4   The sensations, or perceptions, referred to lead to action.
5   This seems to mean, that the powers of smelling, &c., when attributed to the self, make him appear as an agent, as an active
6   I. e. action, agent, and instrument, Arguna Misra.
7   I. e. the three, goodness, passion, and darkness.
8   It is these seven from which the self is to be emancipated. ‘I’ must mean the self, not the Brâhmana who speaks.
      [ See: Secret Doctrine vol 1, p87, where this passage is quoted. Wizi ]

 279     CHAPTER X, 14.

qualities 1 which are in the position of the deities, each in its own place, always enjoy the offering according to prescribed rules. To him who is not learned, eating various kinds of food, the feeling of this or that being mine adheres. And cooking food for himself; he, through the feeling of this or that being mine, is ruined 2. The eating of that which should not be eaten, and drinking of intoxicating drinks also destroys him. He destroys the food, and destroying that food he is destroyed in return. The learned man, being himself a ruler, destroying this food again produces it 3. And not even a trifling obstaclearises to him from that food. Whatever is thought by the mind 5, whatever is spoken by speech, whatever is heard by the ear, whatever is seen by the eye, whatever is touched by the sense of touch, and whatever is smelt by the nose, absorbing all these offerings from all sides, together with those senses which with the mind are six 6, my fire 7 of high qualifications 8, shines dwelling within the body. My sacrifice of concentration of mind is in progress, the performance of which yields the fire of knowledge ;
1   I. e., I presume, the senses. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 55. The learned do not suppose their self to have aught to do with them. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 64.
2   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 53; Manu III, 118.
3   His knowledge gives him this power. He is not ‘destroyed’ by the food as the other man is. Nîlakantha compares Brihadâranyaka,
      p. 884. See, too, p. 260, note i supra.
4   I. e. mischief owing to the destruction of life necessary for getting food, says Nîlakantha quoting Brihadâranyaka, p. 913.
5   This includes the operation of the understanding also. Nîlakantha says this verse explains what the word ‘food’ means here.
6   For the phrase cf. Gîtâ, p. 112.
That is to say, my self, Arguna Misra. See p. 259, note 3 supra.
8   As the objects of sense &c. are all absorbed into it.
9   It is called ‘fire,’ as it burns up all action. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 62.


280     ANUGÎTÂ.

the Stotra in which, is the upward life-wind; the Sastra, the downward life-wind; and which is very beneficial on account of the abandonment of everything 1; the Brahman priest in which, is the counsellor in all action 2; the Hotri priest, the self; the Adhvaryu priest, the self whose hymn of praise is the offering; the Sastra of the Prasâstri, truth; and the Dakshinâ, final emancipation. On this, too, Rik verses are recited by the men who understand Nârâyana 4—the god Nârâyana to whom they formerly offered animal 5 offerings. On that Sâman hymns 6 are sung, of which an illustration is stated 7.
1   Arguna Misra’s commentary is not intelligible here, so I follow Nîlakantha, but diffidently.
2   I. e. the mind, say the commentators. ‘Mantâ ‘ simply is given among the synonyms of Ahańkâra at Sâńkhya-sâra, p. 16.
3   I. e. the actions performed for knowledge of the truth, Arguna Misra.
4   Nîlakantha refers to a Rik ‘Tapa âsîd-grihapatih,’ and also the famous allegory at the end of the Taittirîya-âranyaka. These are
     cited, he says, as authorities for this ‘sacrifice consisting of concentration of mind.’
5   I. e. the senses, Nîlakantha. Arguna Misra compares the whole passage with the Purusha Sűkta, which are the Rik verses alluded
      to, according to him. He refers for further explanations to his own commentary on that Sűkta of the Rig-veda.
6    They sing these hymns, out of the gratification produced by knowledge of the self says Nîlakantha, and he cites
       Taittirîya-âranyaka, p. 749. See also Taittirîya-upanishad, p. 138, and Sankara’s commentary there.
7   The readings of our texts here are not very satisfactory. The illustration is stated, says Nîlakantha, whose reading we follow, by
      the Taittirîyas in the passage referred to in the last note. Arguna Misra’s reading means ‘such as Tâhu kâhu,’ which would seem
      to be the words of the Sâman hymn referred to. But his commentary does not show what the words before him were. The whole
      figure as drawn out in this passage is not quite clear, though the general sense is pretty intelligible. Cf. the allegories at
      Aitareya-brâhmana, pp. 132, 133, and at the close of the Taittirîya-âranyaka.


 281     CHAPTER XI, 3.

O modest one! understand that god Nârâyana, who is the self of everything.


There is one directory 1 ; there is no second director. I speak concerning him who abides in the heart. This being, the director, dwells in the heart and directs all creatures . Impelled by that same being, I move as I am ordered, like water on a declivity. There is one instructor; there is no second different from him. I speak concerning him who abides in the heart. Taught by that instructor, all snakes whatever are ever hated in the world 2. There is one kinsman; there is no second different from him. I speak concerning him who abides in the heart. Taught by him kinsmen are possessed of kinsmen 3, and the seven Rishis, O son of Prithâ 4! shine in heaven 5. There
1   I. e. the Supreme Being, Arguna Misra. Nîlakantha connects this with the preceding chapter by saying that this describes
      Nârâyana, who is there mentioned. See Sânti Parvan (Moksha Dharma), chap. 226, St. 8 (Bombay ed.)
2   The natural feelings of animosity are caused by the Supreme Being within. Such seems to be the meaning. Cf. Gîtâ, pp. 128,
     129. I may remark that Arguna Misra seems to interpret the original words, which we have rendered by ‘I speak concerning him,’
      &c., to mean ‘I repeat what has been said by,’ &c. This does not seem to me to be satisfactory; and it may be added, too, that
     Arguna Misras interpretation appears in his gloss not on the first verse, about the ‘director,’ but only on the second, about the
     ‘instructor.’ Hated = full of animosity, Nîlakantha.
3   I. e. the feeling of kinsmanship arises from his inspiration.
4   The poet seems to be nodding here, as this expression cannot form part of the Brâhmana’s speech to his wife.
5   The seven sages are always mentioned together, and may well be spoken of as types of the feeling of kinship.


282     ANUGÎTÂ.

is one hearer 1; there is no second different from him. I speak concerning him who abides in the heart. Living under that instructor, according to the proper mode of living with an instructor, Sakra 2 acquired immortality in all worlds. There is one enemy; there is no second different from him. I speak concerning him who abides in the heart. Taught by that instructor, all snakes whatever are ever hated in the world 3.
On this, too, they relate an ancient story, about the instruction of the snakes, and the gods, and sages, by Pragâpati. The gods, and sages, and the snakes, and the demons, approaching Pragâpati, said to him ‘Tell us the highest good.’ To them who were inquiring about the highest good, the venerable one said, ‘Om 4, the Brahman, in a single syllable.’ Hearing that, they ran away in various directions 5. When they were running for instruction regarding the self, the inclination of the snakes to biting had been already formed. The natural inclination of the demons towards ostentatiousness had been formed. The gods had been engaged in gifts, and the great sages in restraint of the senses. Having had one teacher,
1   Nîlakantha takes this to mean pupil, but it is difficult to reconcile that with the rest of the passage. Arguna Misra renders it by
     ‘the destroyer of every one’s doubts.’ For that, it will be necessary to take the word as a form of the causative, and not the simple
      root sru, to hear. But see, too, p. 283, ‘the instructor . . . the hearer.’
2   Cf. Sanatsugâtîya, p. 152, note 1.
3   The words here are nearly the same as before; the commentators give no explanation of the repetition. But see p. 281, note 2.
4   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 79. The full sense is that from the study of this Om the highest good is attained.
5   I. e. to their own dwellings, believing that they had learnt what they wanted.


 283     CHAPTER XI, 17.

and having been instructed with one word, the snakes, the gods, the sages, and the demons, all engaged in different 1 pursuits. One hears what is said to one and apprehends it duly; but even to one who inquires and extols highly, there is no other instructor 2. And by his counsel does action afterwards take place. The instructor, the learner, the hearer, and the enemy, are always within the heart. Acting sinfully in the world, he becomes a man of sinful conduct. Acting virtuously in the world he becomes a man of virtuous conduct 3. And he becomes a man of conduct according to his own desire 4, who, owing to his desires, is given up to the pleasures of the senses. But he who, casting aside vows 5 and actions, merely adheres to the Brahman, he moving about in the world identifying himself with the Brahman, becomes a Brahmakârin. To him the Brahman itself is the fuel, the Brahman the fire, the Brahman his origin, the Brahman water, the Brahman the instructor. He is rapt in the
1   The meaning seems to be that the original inclination was not altered by the new instruction received by them. Nîlakantha
      seems to understand the passage differently. What has been rendered in the text by ‘when they were running for instruction,’
      he renders by ‘when they were practically carrying out the instruction received by them;’ but this rendering seems to omit all
      consideration of the words ‘Pűrvameva tu’—already. Though, therefore, there are one or two circumstances in favour of this
      construction, I have adopted the other. Cf. Brihadâranyaka, p. 964.
2    The meaning is that the real instructor is within oneself, ‘abiding in the heart,’ as said before, although instruction may in form
      be received from one outside, of whom one seeks to learn, and whom one respects (or extols highly, as the text has it), and
      although such instruction may be well apprehended.
3   Cf. Brihadâranyaka, pp. 546—853.
4   See Gîtâ, p. 117.
5   I. e. fasts and other like observances.


284     ANUGÎTÂ.

Brahman 1. Such is this subtle life as a Brahmakârin understood by the wise. Understanding it they practised it, being instructed by the Kshetragńa 2 .


The Brâhmana said:

I have crossed beyond that very impassable place, in which fancies are the gadflies and mosquitoes 3, in which grief and joy are cold and heat, in which delusion is the blinding darkness, in which avarice is the beasts of prey and reptiles, in which desire and anger are the obstructors, the way to which consists in worldly objects, and is to be crossed by one singly4. And I have entered the great forest 5.

The Brâhmana’s wife said:

Where is that forest, O very intelligent person! what are the trees there , and what the rivers, and the hills and mountains; and at what distance is that forest?
I   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 61. The water is that required for the sacrifice. The words ‘the Brahman is his origin’ are not quite clear, as being
    not connected with the figure employed. Perhaps it might be taken otherwise thus, ‘the Brahman is the fire produced from the
   Brahman,’ this last standing for the arani.
2   I. e. one who understands the truth, Nîlakantha; God, Arguna Misra. The same sentence winds up two of the following chapters;
     and at p. 310 Krishna says the Kshetragńa signifies the supreme self. See Gîtâ, p. 202 seq.
3   Cf. Lalita Vistara, p. 44. [See: Secret Doctrine vol 2. p. 637 for much more. Wiz]
4   I. e. not with the help of son, wealth, &c., says Nîlakantha, as each man’s salvation after having got into the course of worldly life
     depends on himself. Cf. Sânti Parvan (Moksha Dharma), chap. s. St. 32, and Manu IV, 240; obstructor, thief, Arguna Misra.
5   I. e. the Brahman.  Nîlakantha compares a text from the Sruti, ‘Kim svid vanam ka u sa vriksha âsa;’ see Rig-veda X, 31, 7.


 285     CHAPTER XII, 8.

The Brăhmana said:

There is nothing else more delightful than that, when there is no distinction from it. There is nothing more afflicting than that, when there is a distinction from it’. There is nothing smaller than that, there is nothing larger than that’. There is nothing more subtle than that; there is no other happiness equal to that. Entering it, the twice- born do not grieve, and do not exult’. They are not afraid of anybody, and nobody is afraid of them. In that forest are seven large trees , seven fruits, and seven guests; seven hermitages, seven forms of concentration, and seven forms of initiation. This is the description of the forest. That forest is filled with trees producing splendid flowers and fruits of five colours . That forest
1   Cf. Khândogya, pp. 516, 517.
2   Cf. Sanatsugâtîya, p. 180 and note there.
3   Cf. as to all this Gîtâ, p.101
4    This is not the forest spoken of before, but what has been before called the ‘impassable place,’ but which also at p. 286 is by
       implication called a forest, viz, the course. of worldly life.
5   Viz, the eye, ear, tongue, skin, and nose, and the mind, and understanding—these are called trees, as being producers of the
      fruits, namely, the pleasures and pains derived from their several operations; the guests are the powers of each sense personified—
      they receive the fruits above described; the hermitages are the trees above mentioned, in which the guests take shelter; the seven
      forms of concentration are the exclusion from the self of the seven functions of the seven senses &c. already referred to; the seven
      forms of initiation refer to the initiation into the higher life, by repudiating as not one’s own the actions of each member out of the
      group of seven. Cf. as to this Khândogya, p. 259, and commentary there.
6   Cf. for these different numbers of colours, Yoga-sűtra II, 19, and commentary, p. 205, and Sânkhya-sâra, p. 18. The trees
     here meant are the Tanmâtras, or subtle elements, and the theory is that the Gandha-tanmâtra, or subtle element of smell,
     has five qualities, its own special one, so to say, and the four special ones of the others; the next is taste, the next colour, the
     next touch, and the last sound; each has one quality less than its predecessor. See Yoga-sűtra, p. 106, and gloss; Sâńkhya-sűtra I,
     62; and Vedânta Paribhâshâ, p. 45.


286     ANUGÎTÂ.

is filled with trees producing flowers and fruits of four colours. That forest is filled with trees producing flowers and fruits of three colours, and mixed. That forest is filled with trees producing flowers and fruits of two colours, and of beautiful colours. That forest is filled with trees producing flowers and fruits of one colour, and fragrant. That forest is filled with two large trees producing numerous flowers and fruits of undistinguished colours 1. There is one fire 2 here, connected with the Brahman , and having a good mind 4. And there is fuel here, namely the five senses. The seven forms of emancipation from them are the seven forms of initiation 5. The qualities are the fruits, and the guests eat the fruits. There, in various places, the great sages receive hospitality. And when they have been worshipped and have disappeared 6, another forest shines forth, in which intelligence is the tree, and emancipation the fruit, and which possesses shade in the form of tran-
1   These are mind and understanding; the fruits and flowers are here of ‘undistinguished colours,’ as the text expresses it, since
     they include the colours of all the fruits of all the other five sets of trees; that is to say, the subject-matter of their operations is
     sound, taste, &c., the subject-matters of all the senses together. ‘Undistinguished colours’ is, perhaps, more literally ‘of colours
     not clear.’ Arguna Misra paraphrases it by ‘of variegated colours,’ which is no doubt the true ultimate sense.
2   The self, Nîlakantha. See p. 279, note 7 supra.
3   I. e., I presume, devoted to the Brahman.
4   I. e. true knowledge, Arguna Misra.
5   See note 5, p. 285.
6    I.e. when the senses having worked, as unconnected with the self, are finally absorbed into it. Cf. Sâńkhya-kârikâ and Katha, p. 151.


287    CHAPTER XII, 21.

quillity, which depends on knowledge, which has contentment for its water, and which has the Kshetragńa within for the sun. The good who attain to that have no fear afterwards. Its end cannot be perceived upwards or downwards or horizontally 1. There always dwell seven females there 2, with faces turned downwards, full of brilliance, and causes of generation. They absorb  3 all the higher delights of people, as inconstancy absorbs everything 4. In that same 5 principle the seven perfect sages, together with their chiefs, the richest 6, abide, and again emerge from the same. Glory, brilliance, and greatness, enlightenment, victory, perfection, and power 7—these seven rays follow after this same sun. Hills and mountains also are there collected together, and rivers and streams flowing with water produced from the Brahman 8 And there is the confluence of the rivers in the secluded place 9 for the
1   It extends on all sides, its end cannot be perceived on any side.
2   These are, according to Arguna Misra, the Mahat, Ahańkâra, and five Tanmâtras. Their faces are turned downwards, as they
     are obstacles in the way upwards, viz, the way of final emancipat on; they are brilliant, as they light up the course of worldly
     life; and hence, too, they are ‘causes of generation.’ They give birth to the universe.
3   They conceal the higher delight of final emancipation.
4    I follow Arguna Misra, but the text is doubtful.
5   Viz. the Brahman.
6   Cf. Khândogya, pp. 295—300. The word sages here, as before, means the various organs. See Brihadâranyaka, p. 415.
7   Glory = renown; brilliance = Brahmic splendour (Brahmategas); perfection=obtaining what is desired; power=not being
     conquered by others, Arguna Misra. About the sun, see line of text above.
8   I e. contentment. See the second line in the text above.
9   I. e. the space in the heart, the sacrifice being that of ‘concentration of mind,’ yogayagńa,—Nîlakantha. A confluence of rivers
     is very sacred—here the meaning intended seems to be the absorption of all desires by contentment into the heart.

288     ANUGÎTÂ.

sacrifice, whence those who are contented in their own selfs repair to the divine grandsire himself. Those whose wishes are reduced 1, whose wishes are fixed on good vows, whose sins are burnt up by penance, merging the self in the self 2, devote themselves to Brahman. Those people who understand the forest of knowledge 3, praise tranquillity. And aspiring to that forest, they are born so as not to lose courage 4. Such, indeed, is this holy forest, as understood by Brâhmanas. And understanding it, they act accordingly, being directed by the Kshetragńa.


The Brâhmana said:

I do not smell smells, I perceive no tastes, I see no colour, and I do not touch, nor yet do I hear various sounds, nor even do I entertain any fancies 5. Nature desires objects which are liked; nature hates all objects which are hateful 6. Desire and hatred are born from nature , as the upward and
1   Literally, ‘lean.’
2   I. e. the body in the soul, Arguna Misra.
3   Knowledge is Brahman, which is described as a forest here, Arguna Misra.
4   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 70.
5   This is the name for the operations of the mind.
6  The sense is similar to that at Gîtâ, p.55 . The self has nothing to do with these feelings; the qualities deal with the qualities.
7  Cf. Gîtâ, p. 65. The meaning of nature here, as in the Gîtâ, is in substance the result of all previous action with which the self
    has been associated, which result, of course, exists connected not with the self but with the developments of nature, in the form
    of body, senses, &c. The comparison appears to mean that the feelings of desire &c. are, like the life-winds, unconnected with
    the self, though associated with it, and are both alike manifestations of nature.

 289     CHAPTER XIII, 7.

downward life-winds, after attaining to the bodies of living creatures. Apart from them, and as the constant entity underlying them, I see the individual self in the body. Dwelling in that self , I am in no wise attached 1 to anything through desire or anger, or old age, or death. Not desiring any object of desire, not hating any evil, there is no taint on my natures 2, as there is no taint of a drop of water on lotuses 3. They are inconstant things appertaining to this constant principle which looks on various natures. Although actions are performed, the net of enjoyments does not attach itself to it, as the net of the sun’s rays does not attach itself to the sky 4. On this 5, too, they relate an ancient story, in the shape of a dialogue between an Adhvaryu priest and an ascetic. Understand that, O glorious one! Seeing an animal being sprinkled 6 at a sacrificial ceremony, an ascetic who was sitting there spoke to the Adhvaryu, censuring the act as destruction of life. The Adhvaryu
1   Nîlakantha compares Brihadâranyaka, p. 770. Arguna Misra has a different reading, meaning ‘liable to be subjugated .‘
2   The plural, which is in the original, is unusual. The various aspects of the ‘result’ stated in p. 288, note 7, being looked at
      separately, are described as ‘natures,’ like the leaves of a lotus, which in their ensemble make one lotus.
3   Lalita Vistara, p. 2, and p. 64 supra.
4   The figure seems to be somewhat like that at Gîtâ, p. 82, about the atmosphere and space, which latter remains untainted by
      the former. Looking on various natures, i.e. as distinct from the self.
5   Viz, the remaining untainted.
6   I.e. with water, preparatory to its being offered up for the sacrifice.


290     ANUGÎTÂ.

answered him saying, this goat will not be destroyed. This creature will obtain welfare, since the Vedic text is such. For that part of him which is of the earth will go to the earth; whatever in him is produced from water, that will enter water. His eye will enter the sun, his ear the quarters, and his life-winds likewise the sky 1. There is no offence on my part, adhering as I do to the scriptures 2

The Ascetic said:

If you perceive that good will result upon his life being severed from him , then the sacrifice is for the goat, what benefit is it to you? Let the brother, father, mother, and friend of the goat give you their consent 3; take him to them and consult them , especially as he is dependent. You ought to inquire of those who can give their consent thus. After hearing their consent, the matter will be fit for consideration 4. The life-winds 5, too, of this goat have gone to their sources, and I think only his unmoving body remains. To those who wish to derive enjoyment from the slaughter of a living creature , the unconscious body being comparable to fuel, that which is called an animal becomes
1   Cf. Brihadâranyaka, p. 542, and p. 337 below.
2   Cf. Khândogya-upanishad, p. 627, and also Sârîraka Bhâshya on Sűtra III, i, 25, p. 774.
3   I. e. for his slaughter, which is to bring welfare to the goat. Arguna Misra says that this is a Sort of reductio ad absurdum, as the
      sacrifice is in truth not in the interests of the goat at all.
4   Viz, whether the goat should be killed. Without their consent he ought not to be slaughtered; with their consent, it becomes a
      matter for consideration, Arguna Misra.
5   It may also mean the senses, as in the Khândogya, p. 297.


 291     CHAPTER XIII, 21.

the fuel 1. The teaching of the elders 2 is, that refraining from slaughter of living creatures is the duty among all duties. We maintain that that action should be performed which involves no slaughter. Our proposition is no slaughter of living creatures . If I spoke further, it would be possible to find fault with your proceedings in many ways 3. Always refraining from the slaughter of all beings is what we approve. We substantiate this from what is actually visible 4, we do not rely on what is not visible.

The Adhvaryu said:

You enjoy the earth’s quality of fragrance, you drink watery juices, you see the colours of shining bodies, you touch the qualities of the air, you hear the sound produced in space, you think by the mind on the objects of mental operations. And all these entities, you believe, have life. You have not then abstained from taking life. You are engaged in the slaughter of living creatures 5. There is no movement 6 without slaughter of living creatures Or what do you think, O twice-born one?
1   This is not very clear, but the meaning seems to be that the slaughter is committed for the enjoyment of the sacrificer; the
      sacrificer only requires fuel, and the slaughtered animal is then used for that purpose.
2   Cf. Khândogya, p. 627, and next note; and Gîtâ, inter alia, p. 114, and p. 348 infra.
3   See Sâńkhyatattvakaumudî, p. 7.
4   I. e. a rule expressly laid down. What is not visible means what is not expressly stated, but is to be derived by inference, and so
      forth (cf. Âpastamba I, 1, 4 , 8). The express text is the famous one, ‘Na himsyâtsarvâ bhűtâni.’ Himsâ, which is rendered
      slaughter here, may mean also ‘giving pain’ generally.
5   This is the tu quoque argument. The sustentation of life requires some sort of slaughter.
6   I. e. the support of the body, says Arguna Misra.


292     ANUGÎTÂ.

The Ascetic said:

The indestructible and the destructible, such is the double manifestation of the self. Of these the indestructible is the existent 1, the manifestation as an individual 2 entity is called the destructible 3. The life-winds, the tongue, the mind, and the quality of goodness, together with the quality of passion 4, these make up the manifestations as individual entities. And to one who is free from these manifestations, who is free from the pairs of opposites, who is devoid of expectations, who is alike to all beings, who is free from the thought that this or that is mine, who has subdued his self, and who is released on all hands 5, there is no fear anywhere 6.

The Adhvaryu said:

O best of talented men! one should in this world
1   Arguna Misra takes it otherwise, ‘the true nature of the Sat, the self.’ Nîlakantha renders the original by sadrűpam without
      further explanation. This indestructible seems to correspond to that mentioned at Gîtâ, p. 113, which should be considered in
      connection with Gîtâ, pp. 73, 74. The note at the former page is, perhaps, not quite accurately expressed, as the word ‘material
      cause’ conveys some inadmissible associations. Perhaps ‘underlying principle’ might be a nearer approach to the correct idea.
      The existent will thus be that which really exists, as it is indestructible.
2    Qf Gîtâ, P. 77.
3   See Sânti Parvan  [see: Secret Doctrine vol 1, p534.Wiz]
4   Arguna Misra says, ‘The life-winds here are indicative of the operations of the organs of action (as to which see p. 290, note 5
supra), the tongue of the perceptive senses, the mind of the internal activities, the quality of goodness of all sources of pleasure,
      and passion of all sources of pain,’ the last two apparently covering the external world, the previous ones the human activities,
      internal and external.
5   Released scil, from piety or impiety, &c.,—Arguna Misra, who says ‘self’ in the phrase preceding means mind.
6   Because, says Arguna Misra, according to the very authority which says there is sin in slaughter, all sin is destroyed by
     knowledge. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 64.

 293     CHAPTER XIV, 2.

dwell in company of good men only 1. For having heard your opinion, my mind is enlightened. O venerable sir! I approach you, in the belief that you are the Lord; and I say to you , O twice-born one! there is no fault attaching to me, performing as I have done the rites performed by others 2

The Brâhmana said:

With this explanation, the ascetic thereafter remained silent, and the Adhvaryu also proceeded with the great sacrifice, freed from delusion. Thus Brâhmanas understand the very subtle emancipation to be of this nature, and understanding it, they act accordingly, being directed by the Kshetragńa.


The Brâhmana said:

On this 3, too, they relate an old story, in the shape of a dialogue, O you of a pure heart! between Kârtavîrya and the ocean. There lived once a king named Arguna 4, a descendant of Kritavîrya, possessed of a thousand arms, who with his bow conquered the whole earth up to the ocean. Once
1   Cf. Taittirîya-upanishad, p. 40.
2   The readings here in the MSS. are not satisfactory. I adopt as the best that which appears to have been before Arguna Misra.
     The meaning seems to be this :—I have now understood the truth, but I cannot be blamed for having hitherto done that which
     I saw every one else do. Now I have had the benefit of conversation with a good man, and have become free from my delusion.
3   Namely, that final emancipation is not to he obtained by action, and that slaughter is sinful.
4   He is also called a Yogin at Raghuvamsa VI, 38. See Mallinâth’s commentary there.

294     ANUGÎTÂ.

on a time, as we have heard, he was walking about near the sea, proud of his strength, and showering hundreds of arrows on the sea. The ocean, saluting him, and with joined hands, said, ‘O brave man! do not throw arrows on me. Say, what shall I do for you? The creatures, who take shelter with me, are being destroyed, O tiger-like king! by the great arrows thrown by you. Give them security,
O Lord!’

Arguna said:

If there is anywhere any wielder of the bow equal to me in battle, who might stand against me in the field, name him to me.

The ocean said:

If, O king! you have heard of the great sage Gamadagni, his son is the proper person to show you due hospitality 1.
Then the king, full of great wrath, went away, and arriving at that hermitage approached Râma only. In company with his kinsmen, he did many acts disagreeable to Râma, and caused much trouble to the high-souled Râma. Then the power of Râma, whose power was unbounded, blazed forth, burning the hosts of the enemy, O lotus-eyed one! And then Râma, taking up his axe, hacked away that man of the thousand arms in battle, like a tree of many branches. Seeing him killed and fallen, all his kinsmen assembled together, and taking swords and lances, surrounded the descendant of Bhrigu. Râma also taking up a bow, and hurriedly mounting a chariot, shot away volleys of arrows, and blew away the army of the king. Then some of the
1   I. e. by giving him what he desired—a ‘foeman worthy of his steel’ to fight with him.

 295     CHAPTER XIV, 20.

Kshtriyas, often troubled by fear of the son of Gamadagni, entered mountains and inaccessible places, like antelopes troubled by a lion. And the subjects of those Kshatriyas who were not performing their prescribed duties 1 through fear of him, became Vrishalas, owing to the disappearance of Brâhmanas 2 Thus the Dravidas, Âbhîras, Paundras, together with the Sâbaras, became Vrishalas 3, owing to the abandonment of their duties by Kshatriyas. Then when the heroic children of Kshatriya women were destroyed again and again, the Kshatriyas, who were produced by the Brâhmanas 4, were also destroyed by the son of Gamadagni. At the end of the twenty-first slaughter, a bodiless voice from heaven, which was heard by all people, spoke sweetly to Râma, O Râma! O Râma! desist from this slaughter. What good, dear friend, do you perceive, in taking away the lives of these kinsmen of Kshatriyas over and over again?’ Then, too, his grandfathers 5, with Rikîka as their head, likewise said to the high-souled Râma , ‘Desist, O noble one6!’ But Râma, not forgiving his father’s
1   Viz, the protection of their subjects.
2   As the kings failed to protect the people, the Brâhmanas apparently were nowhere forthcoming.
3   Cf. Muir, Sanskrit Texts, vol. i, pp. 482 seq., 358, 391; vol. ii, p. 423; Sânti Parvan, ch. 65, St. I3 ch. 207, St. 42 (Râgadharma).
4   As Kshatriyas were required for the protection of the people, the Brâhmanas procreated them on Kshatriya women. See Muir,
      Sanskrit Text, vol. i, p. 451 seq. And as they were the offspring of these anomalous connexions they are described as ‘kinsmen of
      Kshatriyas.’ Cf. Khândogya, p. 317; Brihadâranyaka, p. 1037 and comments there. As to heroic, see Muir, Sanskrit Texts, vol. iv, p. 302 note.
5   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 40, note I.
6   See as to the whole story, Muir, Sanskrit Texts, vol. i, p. 442.


296     ANUGÎTÂ.

murder, said to those sages, ‘You ought not to keep me back from this.’

The Pitris said:

O best of victors! you ought not to destroy these kinsmen of Kshatriyas. It is not proper for you, being a Brâhmana, to slaughter these kings.


The Pitris said:

On this 1, too, they relate an ancient story; hearing that story, O best of the twice-born! you should act accordingly. There was once a royal sage, named Alarka, whose penance was very great, who understood duty, who was veracious, high-souled, and very firm in his vows. Having with his bow conquered this world as far as the ocean,—having performed very difficult deeds 2,—he turned his mind to subtlesubjects . While he was sitting at the foot of a tree, O you of great intelligence! his thoughts, abandoning those great deeds, turned to subtle questions.

Alarka said:

My mind is become too strong 4 that conquest is constant in which the mind is conquered. Though surrounded by enemies, I shall direct my arrows elsewhere 5. As by its unsteadiness, it wishes 6 to
1   The impropriety or sinfulness of slaughter.
2   Such as the subjugation of enemies and so forth.
3   The Brahman, says Nîlakantha.
4   I. e. too strong to be under control.
5   That is to say, elsewhere than towards the external foes with whom he was waging war.
6   The text is unsatisfactory here. I adopt Nîlakantha’s reading.

 297     CHAPTER XV, 12.

make all mortals perform action, I will cast very sharp-edged arrows at the mind.

The mind said:

These arrows, O Alarka! will not penetrate through me at all. They will only pierce your own vital part, and your vital part being pierced, you will die. Look out for other arrows by which you may destroy me.
       Hearing that, he then spoke these words after consideration :—

Alarka said :

Smelling very many perfumes, one hankers after them only. Therefore I will cast sharp arrows at the nose.

The nose1 said:

These arrows, O Alarka! will not penetrate through me at all. They will only pierce your own vital part, and your vital part being pierced, you will die. Look out for other arrows by which you may destroy me.
       Hearing that, he then spoke these words after consideration :—

Alarka said:

Enjoying savory tastes, this tongue hankers after
1   This and the other corresponding words must be understood to refer not to the physical nose and so forth, but the sense seated
      there. The nose here, for instance, stands for the sense of smell. Nîlakantha understands all these words of Alarka as indicating
      the so-called Hatha-yoga, which, he adds, invariably occasions death. As to the throwing of arrows at the mind, he says, it
      means, ‘I will subdue the mind by the restraint of the excretive organs by means of the Hatha-yoga.’ And finally he says, ‘A
      man, having restrained all the senses by means of the Hatha-yoga, merely droops away; becoming deficient in those senses,
      he does not accomplish his end.’


298     ANUGÎTÂ.

them only. Therefore I will cast sharp arrows at the tongue.

The tongue said:

These arrows, O Alarka! will not penetrate through me at all. They will only pierce your own vital part, and your vital part being pierced, you will die. Look out for other arrows by which you may destroy me.
        Hearing that, he then spoke these words after consideration :—

Alarka said:

Touching various objects of touch, the skin hankers after them only. Therefore I will tear off the skin by various feathered arrows.

The skin said:

These arrows, O Alarka! will not penetrate through me at all. They will only pierce your own vital part, and your vital part being pierced, you will die. Look out for other arrows by which you may destroy me.
        Hearing that, he then said after consideration :—

 Alarka said:

Hearing various sounds, the ear hankers after them only. Therefore I will cast sharp arrows at the ear.

The ear said:

These arrows, O Alarka! will not penetrate through me at all. They will only pierce your own vital part, and then you will lose your life. Look out for other arrows by which you may destroy me.
        Hearing that, he then said after consideration :—

 299     CHAPTER XV, 28.

Alarka said:

Seeing numerous colours, the eye hankers after them only. Therefore I will destroy the eye with sharp arrows.

The eye said:

These arrows, O Alarka! will not penetrate through me at all. They will only pierce your own vital part, and your vital part being pierced, you will die. Look out for other arrows by which you may destroy me.
        Hearing that, he then said after consideration :—

Alarka said:

This understanding forms various determinations by its operation. Therefore I will cast sharp arrows at the understanding.

The understanding said:

These arrows, O Alarka ! will not penetrate through me at all. They will only pierce your own vital part, and your vital part being pierced, you will die. Look out for other arrows by which you may destroy me.

The Brâhmana 1 said:

Then Alarka even there employed himself in a fearful penance 2 difficult to perform ; but he did not obtain any arrows for these seven by his devotions. Then that king deliberated with a mind very intent on one subject, and after deliberating for a long time, O best of the twice-born! Alarka, the best of talented men , could not arrive at anything better
1   Sic in our copies. It should be the Pitris, seeing that they are relating Alarka’s story to Parasurâma.
2   Meditation, or pondering, according to Nîlakantha.


300     ANUGÎTÂ.

than concentration of mind 1. Then directing his mind to one point 2, he became steady, and applied himself to concentration of mind. And then the brave man forthwith destroyed the senses with one arrow; and entering the self by means of concentration of mind, he reached the highest perfection. And the royal sage, amazed, then uttered this verse, O! Alas! that we should have engaged in all external matters ; that being possessed of a desire for enjoyments, we should have devoted ourselves before now to sovereignty! I have now subsequently learnt that there is no higher happiness than concentration of mind.’ Do you understand this too, O Râma! and do not kill Kshatriyas. Perform a fearful 3 penance, thence you will obtain the highest good. Thus spoken to by his grandfathers, the noble son of Gamadagni engaged himself in fearful penance, and attained that perfection which is difficult to reach.


The Brâhmana said:

There are, verily, three foes in this world, and they are stated to be divided ninefold, according to qualities. Exultation, pleasure, joy 4 these three
1   I.e. the râga-yoga, says Nîlakantha, which consists in mere control of the mind. Cf. Sâńkhya-sâra, p. 39.
2   See Yoga-sűtra, p. 45.
This means difficult, and occasioning many trials to one who performs it.
4   Nîlakantha says exultation is when one is sure of obtaining what is desired, pleasure when it is obtained, and joy when the thing
     obtained is enjoyed. Arguna Misra takes a different distinction; but our copy of his commentary is not quite intelligible in the
     beginning. Pleasure he takes to mean ‘pride felt in supposing oneself to possess some merit,’ and joy that produced when
     impending danger is averted. As to the next triad, the text is again unsatisfactory. The text printed in the edition which contains
     Nîlakantha’s commentary, is ‘desire, anger,’ &c. There is nothing about them in the commentary. Arguna Misra’s text is the one
     we have adopted. He says, ‘grief, pain caused by loss of what is desired; anger, the pain caused by the counteraction of one’s
     attempts to injure another; persistent hatred, the pain caused by believing another to be doing harm to oneself.’ Persistent hatred
     is Nîlakantha’s interpretation. I think his interpretation is preferable. The two triads seem to be based on one principle of
     gradation. The distinctive marks of the three qualities are pleasure, pain, and delusion respectively, and those characterise the
     three triads stated in the text. See Sânti Parvan (Moksha), chap. 194, St. 27 seq.


 301    CHAPTER XVI, 5.

are qualities appertaining to the quality of goodness. Grief, wrath, persistent hatred, these are stated to be qualities appertaining to the quality of passion. Sleep, sloth, and delusion, these three qualities are qualities appertaining to the quality of darkness. Cutting these off by multitudes of arrows 1, a courageous man, free from sloth, having a tranquil self, and senses controlled, is energetic about subjugating others 2. On this, people who know about ancient times celebrate verses which were sung of old by the king Ambarîsha, who had become tranquil in mind . When vices 3 were in the ascendant, and good (men) were oppressed, Ambarîsha, of great glory, forceably possessed him-
1   Tranquillity and so forth, Nilakantha; practising yoga or concentration of mind, Arguna Misra.
2   I. e. external, says Arguna Misra; external foes of one’s own emancipation is, I presume, what is meant.
3   Arguna Misra says, ‘his own and those of others.’ Nilakantha takes good to mean not men, but tranquillity, &c. The next sentence seems rather
      to militate against this view, which in itself is not a well-founded one.


302     ANUGÎTÂ.

self of the kingdom 1. He then restraining his own vices, and honouring good men, attained high perfection, and sang these verses :
‘I have conquered most vices ; destroyed all foes ; but there is one, the greatest, vice which should be destroyed and which I have not destroyed—that vice , being impelled by which, a creature does not attain freedom from desire, and being troubled by desire, understands nothing while running into ditches 2; that vice , being impelled by which, a man even does what ought not to be done. That avarice—cut it off, cut it off with sharp swords. For from avarice 3 is born desire; then anxiety comes into existence ; and he who desires, mostly acquires qualities appertaining to the quality of passion. Obtaining those, he mostly acquires qualities appertaining to the quality of darkness 4. When the bodily frame is destroyed, he, owing to these qualities, is born again and again, and engages in action. And at the expiration of life, again with his body dismembered and scattered about, he meets death, and again birth. Therefore, properly perceiving this, and restraining avarice by courage, one should wish for sovereignty in the self. This is sovereignty 5; there is no other sovereignty here. The self properly understood is itself the sovereign.’ Such were
1  For the good of the people, says Arguna Misra.
2  I e. base actions, Nilakantha.
3  Avarice, according to Arguna Misra, is the belief that one has not got that which one has, and desire is the wish for more and
    more. Avarice, seems, however, to be the general frame of mind, always wishing for something, never being contented, and
    desire is the wish for a specific object.
4  Which are sources of delusion. Cf. a similar doctrine at Âpastamba II, 5, 140. Nilakantha compares Taittirîya, p. 26.


 303     CHAPTER XVII, 8.

the verses sung with regard to the great sovereignty, by the glorious Ambarîsha, who destroyed the one chief vice , avarice.


The Brâhmana said;

On this 1, too, they relate this ancient story in the shape of a dialogue, O you of a pure heart! between a Brâhmana and Ganaka. King Ganaka, by way of punishment, said to a Brâhmana who had fallen into some offence: ‘You should not live within my do- minions.’ Thus spoken to, the Brâhmana then replied to that best of kings : ‘Tell me, O king! how far extend the dominions which are subject to you. I wish, O Lord! to live in the dominions of another king, and, O master of the earth! I wish to do your bidding according to the Sâstras.’ Thus spoken to by that glorious Brâhmana, the king then heaved frequent and warm sighs, and said nothing in reply. While that king of unbounded power was seated, engaged in meditation, a delusion suddenly came upon him, as the planet 2 upon the sun. Then when the delusion had gone off, the king recovered himself and after a short while spoke these words to the Brâhmana.

Ganaka said:

Though this country, which is the kingdom of my father and grandfather, is subject to me , I cannot
1   On getting rid of the notion that this, that, and the other thing is one’s own,—Arguna Misra. NIlakan/ha agrees, and adds
     also on the subject of cutting off avarice.
2   That is to say, Râhu.

304     ANUGÎTÂ.

find my domain 1, searching through the whole earth. When I did not find it on the earth, I looked for Mithîlâ; when I did not find it in Mithilâ, I looked for my own offspring. When I did not find it among them, then came the delusion on me. Then on the expiration of the delusion, intelligence again came to me. Now I think that there is no domain of mine , or that everything is my domain. Even this self is not mine, or the whole earth is mine. And as mine, so is it that of others too, I believe, O best of the twice-born! Live here, therefore while you desire, and enjoy while you live 2 .

The Brâhmana said:

Tell me, what belief you have resorted to, by which, though this country, which is the kingdom of your father and grandfather, is subject to you, you have got rid of the notion that this or that is mine. What conviction have you adopted, by which verily you consider your whole domain as not your domain, or all as your domain?

Ganaka said:

I understand all conditions here, in all affairs, to be terminable 3, hence I could not find anything that should be called mine 4. Considering whose this
1   Meaning, apparently, that over which he and no one else has power. He contracts his vision gradually, and finds nothing at all
      which he can call his own to the exclusion of others. He explains, further on, how he arrives at the alternative conviction stated
      towards the close of this speech. In the Brihadâranyaka (p. 916) he is said to have offered his kingdom to Yâgńavalkya and
      himself as his slave, after learning the Brahma-vidyâ. See too Muir, Sanskrit Texts, vol. iv, p. 426 seq.
2   See Sânti Parvan (Moksha) I, 13.
3   Conditions of indigence or affluence, Nîlakantha. Arguna Misra’s reading is different.
4   There is a familiar verse, ascribed to Ganaka, which says, ‘If Mithilâ is on fire, nothing of mine is burnt in it .‘ The verse occurs
     in the Mahâbhârata, Sânti Parvan (Moksha Dharma), chap. 178, st. 2, and also chap. 276, St. 4. See too Muir, Sanskrit Texts,
     vol. i, p. 429.

 305     CHAPTER XVII, 21.

was, I thought of the Vedic text about anybody’s property, hence I could not find by my intelligence anything that should be called mine 1. Resorting to this conviction, I have got rid of the notion that this or that is mine. Now hear the conviction, holding which, my domain appears to me to be everywhere 2. I do not desire for myself even smells existing in the nose 3. Therefore the earth 4 being conquered is always subject to me. I do not desire for myself tastes even dwelling in the mouth. Therefore water being conquered is always subject to me. I do not desire for myself the colour or light appertaining to the eye. Therefore light being conquered is always subject to me. I do not desire for myself the feelings of touch which exist in the skin. Therefore air being conquered is always
1   This is not clear. I have followed Nîlakantha’s text. Arguna Misra’s is in the earlier part more intelligible, ‘Whose is this to-day,
     whose to-morrow?’ But I cannot find that there is any Vedic text to this effect. Nîlakantha cites on his text Îsopanishad, p. 5. The
     meaning here seems to be, ‘When I considered as to whom the things I saw in my thoughts belonged to, I remembered the Vedic
     text that one should not wish to obtain another’s property, and so, thinking about the matter with that caution, I could not make
     out that there was anything which I could call my own.’
2   This is the alternative conclusion he has come to.
3   The sense of smell enjoys the smell, my self has nothing to do with it. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 55, also Maitrî, pp. 112, 113.
4   Whenever there is any smell, it is supposed that particles of earth are there; so the meaning here is ‘all things having the quality
     of smell are subject to me,’ and so throughout. The objects of sense are all used for the purposes of the prescribed actions, the
     benefits of which accrue to gods, &c. Cf. Gîtâ, pp. 53, 4, and see also pp. 84, 85

306     ANUGÎTÂ.

subject to me. I do not desire for myself sounds even though existing in the ear. Therefore sounds being conquered are always subject to me. I do not desire for myself the mind always within me. Therefore the mind being conquered is always subject to me. All these actions of mine are, verily, for this purpose, namely for the gods, the Pitris, the Bhűtas, together with guests. Then the Brâhmana, smiling, again said to Ganaka: ‘Know me to be Dharma, come here to-day to learn something about you 1. You are the one person to turn this wheel, the nave of which is the Brahman 2, the spoke the understanding, and which does not turn back 3, and which is checked by the quality of goodness as its circumference 4.‘


The Brâhmana said:

O modest one! I do not move about in this world in the way which, according to your own understanding, you have guessed. I 5 am a Brâhmana, I am
1   I. e. to put him to the test. Such examinations are often referred to in our later literature.
2   I. e. Veda, says Arguna Misra.
3   I. e. says Arguna Misra, which leads to the seat from which there is no return. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 112.
4   The wheel is the yoga, says Arguna Misra. The expression is noteworthy, as being that used of Buddha’s teaching. See on that
     Davids’ Buddhism, p. 4.
5   The man who has achieved final emancipation has got that, in which the benefits to be derived from the course of life of a
     Brâhmana, &c., are included (see p. 191 supra). Hence, says he, the doubt, on which your question is based as to what world
     you will go to by being joined to me, is wrong. See p. 256 supra.


 307     CHAPTER XVIII, 8.

emancipated, I am a forester, and I likewise perform the duties of a householder, observing vows. I am not such, O beautiful one! as you see me with the eye. I pervade every single thing that is in this world. Whatever creatures there are in the world, movable or not moving, know me to be the destroyer of them as fire is of wood 1. Sovereignty over the whole world, and even over heaven; that, or else this knowledge; of these two knowledge is my only wealth 2 . This 3 is the path of the Brâhmanas, by which those who understand that 4 proceed, to households, or residence in forests, or, dwelling with preceptors, or among mendicants 5. With numerous unconfused symbols only one knowledge is approached. And those who, adhering to various symbols and Âsramas, have their understanding full of tranquillity 6, go to the single entity as rivers to the ocean. This path is traversed by the understanding, not by the body 7. Actions have a beginning and an end, and the body is tied down by action. Hence, O beautiful one! you
1   He is speaking here on the footing of the essential identity of everything. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 62.
2   The expression here is clumsy; the meaning is that he prefers knowledge to sovereignty, if the alternative is offered him.
3   Viz, knowledge.
4   I. e. the Brahman.
5   These are the four orders or Âsramas.
6   The knowledge to be acquired, by whatever symbols the attempt to acquire it is made, is but this, that all is one; and that
      is acquired certainly when tranquillity has been achieved.
7   I. e. by realising the identity of everything, not by the actions performed with the body, which, as he goes on to show,
     are perishable, and cannot lead to any lasting result.


need have no fear occasioned by the other world. With your heart intent upon the real entity, you will certainly come into my self.


 The Brâhmana’s wife said:

This is not possible to be understood by one whose self 1 is frivolous, or by one whose self is not refined; and my intelligence is very frivolous, and narrow, and confused. Tell me the means by which this knowledge is acquired. I wish to learn from you the source from which that knowledge proceeds.

The Brâhmana said:

Know that he who devotes himself to the Brahman is the lower Arani, the instructor is the upper Arani. Penance and sacred learning cause the attrition 2, and from that the fire of knowledge is produced.

The Brâhmana’s wife said:

As to this symbol of the Brahman which is denominated the Kshetragńa, where, indeed, is to be found a description of it, by which it 3 is capable of being comprehended?
1   I. e. mind, Arguna Misra.
2   Scil. of the Aranis (i. e. the wood used for kindling fire); the sense is, that the pupil who has penance and Vedic learning goes
     to a teacher for knowledge. See Svetâsvatara, pp. 307, 308.
3   I. e. the Brahman, says Arguna Misra, of which the Kshetragńa is only a symbol. For a definition of Kshetragńa, see Sânti Parvan
     (Moksha), chap. 187, st. 23.

 309    CHAPTER XIX, 9.

The Brâhmana said:

He is without symbols 1, and also without qualities; nothing exists that is a cause of him. I will only state the means by which he can be comprehended or not. A good means is found, namely, action 2 and knowledge, by which that 3 entity, which has the symbols useful for knowledge 4 attributed to it through ignorance, is perceived as by bees 5. In the rules for final emancipation, it is not laid down, that a certain thing should be done, and a certain thing should not 6 But the knowledge of the things beneficial to the self is produced in one who sees and hears 7. One should adopt as many of these things, which are means of direct perception, as may here be practicable—unperceived, and those whose form is perceived 8, in hundreds and in thousands, all of various descriptions. Then one comes near to that beyond which nothing exists.

The Deity said:

Then the mind of the Brâhmana’s wife, after the
1   See Sanatsugâtîya, p. i6o.
2   Viz. that which is required as a preliminary to the acquisition of knowledge, and hence is necessary for final emancipation.
3   The Brahman.
4   I. e. symbols which are to convey a knowledge of the Brahman.
5   I. e. in a way not perfect; as bees hovering above a flower get the fragrance of it without grasping the flower itself, so these
     means give one an imperfect knowledge of the Brahman to be afterwards perfected by constant meditation upon it (nididhyâsa)..
6   As it is in the prior portion of the Vedas, as to sacrifices, &c.
7   Sees, i.e. by contemplation; hears, i. e. from a teacher, Arguna Misra.
8   This seems to mean such things as hearing, reading, &c., which would be ‘perceived’ scil. by the senses; and all intellectual
      operations which would be ‘unperceived.’


310     ANUGÎTÂ.

destruction of the Kshetragńa 1, turned to that which is beyond all Kshetragńas by means of a knowledge of the Kshetra 2 .

Arguna said:

Where, indeed, O Krishna! is that Brâhmana’s wife, and where is that chief of Brâhmanas, by both of whom this perfection was attained? Tell me about them both, O undegraded one!

The Deity said:

Know my mind to be the Brâhmana, and know my understanding to be the Brâhmana’s wife. And he, 0 Dhanagaya! who has been spoken of as the Kshetragńa, is I myself 3.


Arguna said:

Be pleased to explain to me the Brahman which is the highest object of knowledge; for by your favour my mind is much interested in these subtle 4 subjects .

Vâsudeva said:

On this, too, they relate an ancient story in the shape of a dialogue, connected with final emancipation, between a preceptor and a pupil. A talented
1   I. e. after the identification of the individual self with the universal self, when the individual ceases to be perceived as such. Cf.
     Sânti Parvan (Moksha), chap. 187, St. 23.
2   That beyond Kshetragńa=the absolute supreme self. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 106.
3   The substance of this speech, says Arguna Misra, is that the mind and understanding devoted to the supreme lead to final
4   See p. 296 supra. The last chapter closes what in some of the MSS. is called the Brahma Gîtâ, or Brâhmana Gîtâ contained
     in the Anugîtâ Parvan.


311     CHAPTER XX, 12.

pupil, O terror of your foes! asked a Brâhmana preceptor of rigid vows, when he was seated, something about the highest good. ‘I’ he said , ‘whose goal is the highest good, am come to you who are venerable; I pray of you with bowed head, O Brâhmana! that you should explain to me what I ask.’ The preceptor, O son of Prithâ! said to the pupil who spoke thus: ‘I will explain to you everything, O twice-born one! on which you verily have any doubt.’ Thus addressed by the preceptor, O best of the Kauravas! he who was devoted to the preceptor, put his questions with joined hands. Listen to that, O you of great intelligence!

The pupil said:

Whence am I 1, and whence are you? Explain that which is the highest truth. From what were the movable and immovable entities born? By what do entities live, and what is the limit of their life? What is truth, what penance, O Brâhmana? What are called the qualities by the good? And what paths are happy? What is pleasure, and what sin? These questions of mine, O venerable Brâhmana sage! O you of excellent vows! do you be pleased to explain 2 correctly, truly, and accurately. There is none else here who can explain these questions. Speak, O best of those who understand piety! I feel the highest curiosity in this matter . You are celebrated in the worlds as skilled in topics connected with the piety required for final emancipation. And there exists none else but you who can destroy all
1   Compare the questions at the beginning of the Svetâsvatara-upanishad.
2   A similar expression to that in the Sanatsugâtîya, p. 149, and elsewhere.

312     ANUGÎTÂ.

doubts. And we 1, likewise, are afraid of worldly life, and also desirous of final emancipation.

Vâsudeva said:

That talented preceptor, who preserved all vows, O son of Prithâ! O chief of the family of the Kauravas! O restrainer of foes! duly explained all those questions to that pupil, who had approached him for instruction , who put his questions properly, who was possessed of the necessary qualifications, who was tranquil, who conducted himself in an agreeable manner, who was like his shadow 2, and who was a self-restrained ascetic and a Brahmakârin.

The preceptor said:

All this, which is connected with the knowledge of the Vedas 3 and involves a consideration of the real entity, and which is cultivated by the chief sages, was declared by Brahman. We consider knowledge only as the highest thing; and renunciation 4 as the best penance. And he who understands determinately the true object of knowledge which is impregnable 5—the self abiding in all entities—and who can move about anywhere 6, is esteemed highest. The learned man who perceives the abiding together7,
1   It is not easy to account for the change here from the singular to the plural.
2   I.e. always attended on the preceptor. Cf. generally, Mundaka, p. 283.
3   The question was not quite from his own imagination, says Nîlakantha. Arguna Misra has a different reading, which he
      interprets to mean ‘that on which the Vedas are all at one.’
4   Of the fruit of action, Arguna Misra.
5   I. e. not such as to require modification by any other knowledge, as knowledge of the world does.
6   Nîlakantha compares Khândogya, pp. 523—553.
7   I. e. of Kit and Gada, says Nîlakantha; of Brahman and its manifestations, as alluded to, inter alia, at pp. 105, 106, 191 supra.


 313 CHAPTER XX, 22.

and the severance also, and likewise unity and variety 1, is released from misery. He who does not desire anything, and has no egoism about anything, becomes eligible for assimilation with the Brahman, even while dwelling in this world 2 He who knows the truth about the qualities of nature, who understands the creation of all entities, who is devoid of the thought that this or that is mine, and who is devoid of egoism, is emancipated; there is no doubt of that. Accurately understanding the great tree of which the unperceived 3 is the sprout from the seed, which consists of the understanding as its trunk, the branches of which are the great egoism, in the holes of which are the sprouts, namely, the senses, of which the great elements are the flower-bunches 4, the gross elements the smaller boughs, which is always possessed of leaves, always possessed of flowers, and from which pleasant fruits are always produced, on which all entities subsist, which is eternal, and the seed of which is the Brahman; and cutting it with that excellent sword—knowledge—one attains immortality, and casts off birth and death 5. I will state to you to-day, O highly
1   I.e. that variety is only in this world, but that the unity of everything is the true proposition. Cf. inter alia Gîtâ, p. 104.
2   Cf. Brihadâranyaka, p. 858, and Gîtâ, p. 65.
3   I. e. the Prakriti of the Sâńkhyas. [See: Secret Doctrine vol 1, p. 536. Wiz]
4   The great elements are the five tanmâtras of earth, water, fire, air, and space, which afterwards produce what we have called
     the gross elements in the text, namely, the earth &c. which we perceive.
5   The tree typifies worldly life. Cf. pp. 111—189 supra. The leaves and flowers, Arguna Misra says, stand for volition and action;
      and Nîlakantha seems to agree. The tree is called eternal, as worldly life is supposed to have had no beginning. Cf. Sârîraka
      Bhâshya, p. 494, ‘sprout from the seed,’ this rendering is necessitated by Brahman being described as the seed. Cf. Mundaka,
      p. 288; Svetâsvatara, p. 362; Katha, pp. 343, 344.

314     ANUGÎTÂ. 

talented one! the true conclusion 1 about the past, the present, the future, and so forth, and piety, desire, and wealth 2, which is understood by the multitudes of Siddhas, which belongs to olden times, and is eternal, which ought to be apprehended, and understanding which talented men have here attained perfection. Formerly 3, the sages, Brihaspati, Bharadvâga, Gautama, and likewise Bhârgava, Vasishtha, and also Kâsyapa, and Visvâmitra, and Atri also, desiring knowledge, met each other, after having travelled over all paths 4, and becoming wearied of their own actions. And those twice-born sages giving the lead to the old sage Âńgirasa, saw Brahman, from whom all sin has departed, in Brahman’s mansion. Having saluted that high-souled one who was sitting at ease, the great sages, full of humility, asked him this momentous question concerning the highest good: ‘How should one perform good action? how is one released from sin? what paths are happy for us? what is truth and what vice? By what action are the two paths southern and northern obtained 5 ? and what is destruction 6 and emancipation, the birth and death of entities?’ What the grandsire said conformably to the scriptures 7,
1   I. e. the means of arriving at it, Arguna Misra.
2   The triad, the acquisition of which worldly men aspire to.
3   He explains how the doctrine belongs to olden times.
4   I. e. paths of action, Nîlakantha. See Sanatsugâtîya, p. 165.
Namely, the Pitriyâna and Devayâna (Arguna Misra), as to which see Khândogya, p. 341, Kaushîtaki, p. 13, and
     Brihadâranyaka, p. 2034.
6   Nîlakantha seems to interpret this to mean the temporary and final dissolutions of the worlds, on which see, inter alia, Vedânta
     Paribhâshâ, p. 48.
7   So Nîlakantha May it not be ‘according to the received tradition?’


 315     CHAPTER XX, 37.

when thus spoken to by the sages, I will state to you. Listen to that O pupil!

Brahman said:

From the truth were the entities movable and immovable produced. They live by penance 1. Understand that, O you of excellent vows. By their own action they remain transcending their own source 2 For the truth joined with the qualities is invariably of five varieties. The Brahman 3 is the truth ; penance is the truth ; Pragâpati also is truth; the entities are born from the truth ; the universe consisting of all creatures is the truth. Therefore Brâhmanas whose final goal is always concentration of mind, from whom anger and vexation have departed, and who are invariably devoting themselves to piety, are full of the truth. I will speak about those Brâhmanas who are restrained by one another 4, who are possessed of knowledge, who are the establishers of the bridge of piety, and who are the constant creators of the people 5. I will speak of the four branches of knowledge, and likewise of the castes, and of the four orders, distinctly. The wise always speak of piety as one, but having
1   I.e. by action, Nîlakantha. Cf. Mundaka, p. 280, and see p. 166 supra, note I.
2   I.e. they remain apart from the Brahman, being engaged in action. This answers some of the questions put by the pupil to the
     preceptor. As to ‘the truth,’ see p. 162, note 2 supra.
3   I.e. Isvara, or god; penance =piety; Pragâpati= the individual soul, Nîlakantha. Brahman=’ that’ (but how is ‘that’ joined with
     qualities?’); Pragâpati=Brahman, Arguna Misra. They agree about penance and entities (which they take to mean the gross
     elements) and creatures. Brahman and Pragâpati=Virâg and Hiranyagarbha (?), p. 186 supra. Cf. Sânti Parvan (Moksha),
     chap. 190, st. I.
4   I. e. who commit no breach of piety through fear of one another, Nîlakantha.
5   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 86.


316     ANUGÎTÂ.

four quarters. I will speak to you, O twice-born ones! of the happy path, which is productive of pleasure, and which has been invariably travelled over by talented men in old days for obtaining assimilation with the Brahman. Learn, O noble ones! from me, now speaking exhaustively, of that highest path which is difficult to understand, and of the highest seat. The first step is said to be the order of Brahmakârins; the second is that of householders; next after that is that of foresters; and next after that too, the highest step must be understood to be that relating to the Adhyatma 1. Light 2, space, sun, air, Indra, Pragâpati, one sees not these, while one does not attain to the Adhyâtma 3. I will subsequently state the means to that, which you should understand. The order of foresters, the order of the sages who dwell in forests and live on fruits, roots and air, is prescribed for the three twice-born castes . The order of householders is prescribed for all castes. The talented ones speak of piety as having faith for its characteristic. Thus have I described to you the paths leading to the gods 4, which are occupied by good and talented men by means of their actions, and which are bridges of piety. He who, rigid in his vows, takes up any one of these modes of piety separately, always comes in time to perceive the production and dissolution of
1   That is to say, that of the ascetic, who specially devotes himself to the acquisition of knowledge about the relation of the
     supreme and individual self (Adhyâtma).
2   The deity presiding over the bright fortnight, says Arguna Misra. The words space and sun and air must be similarly interpreted.
3   Nîlakantha says ‘one sees these only while one has not had a perception of the self.’ He takes light &c. to mean the ‘universe.’
4   I. e. the means of reaching the Devayâna path (mentioned at p. 314, note 5), Nîlakantha. Cf. also Mundaka, p. 312.


 317     CHAPTER XXI, 2.

all entities 1. Now I shall state with accuracy and with reasons, all the elements which abide in parts in all objects. The great self 2, the unperceived 3 likewise, and likewise also egoism, the ten senses and the one 4 sense , and the five great elements, and the specific characteristics of the five elements 5, such is the eternal creation. The number of the elements is celebrated as being twenty-four plus one. And the talented man who understands the production and dissolution of all elements, he, of all beings, never comes by delusion. He who accurately understands the elements, the whole of the qualities 6, and also all the deities 7, casting aside sin, and getting rid of all bonds, attains to all the spotless worlds.


Brahman said:

That unperceived principle , all-pervading, everlasting, and immutable, which is in a state of equilibrium 8, should be understood to become the city of nine portals, consisting of three qualities, and five
1   Namely, how they are all manifestations of the Brahman, and are all dissolved in it. Cf. inter alia Gîtâ, pp. 74, 92.
2   See the Kathopanishad, p. 149. See also p. 332 infra.
3   See p. 313, note 3 supra.
4   I.e. the mind. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 102.
5   Viz, smell, sound, &c.
6   Tranquillity, self-restraint, &c., Arguna Misra. Are the)’ not rather the three qualities? As to ‘twenty-four plus one’ above,
     see p. 368.
7   Does this mean the senses, as at Gîtâ, p. 123? An accurate understanding of the things noted requires a knowledge of their
     relation to the supreme, which is the means of final emancipation. And see p. 337 infra.
8   See Gîtâ, p. 107, and Sâńkhya-sâra, p. ii, and note 2 p. 331 infra.


318     ANUGÎTÂ.

constituent principles 1, encircled by the eleven 2, consisting of mind 3 as the distinguishing power, and of the understanding as ruler, this is an aggregate made up of eleven 4. The three currents 5 which are within this city support it 6 again and again, and those three channels run on, being constituted by the three qualities. Darkness, passion, and goodness, these are called the three qualities, which are all coupled with one another, and likewise serve one another, which depend on one another, and attend on one another, and are joined to one another 7. And the five constituent principles
1   The five gross elements of which the body is composed (cf. Mahâbhârata, Sânti Parvan, Moksha Dharma, chap. 183, st. i seq.)
      are developments of the unperceived principle, the Prakriti. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 112, where the words ‘which remain (absorbed) in
     nature’ have been inadvertently omitted after ‘with the mind as the sixth.’ As to the nine portals cf. Gîtâ, p. 65.
2   The five active organs, the five perceptive senses, and the mind.
3   This Arguna Misra takes to mean ‘egoism.’ Nîlakantha takes the usual meaning, and adds, objects are produced from mental
     operations; ‘distinguishing,’ that is, manifesting as distinct entities.
4   The eleven are, according to Arguna Misra, the three qualities, the five gross elements, the group of organs and senses as one,
     egoism, and understanding.
5   Viz, the nâdîs, Idâ, Pińgalâ, and Sushumnâ, Arguna Misra, who adds that they are respectively of the quality of darkness,
     passion, and goodness.
6   The three nâdîs, says Arguna Misra, support the life-winds. Nîlakantha takes the three currents to be the threefold inclination
      of the mind, viz, towards a pure piety, towards injuring other living creatures, and towards that mixed piety which requires
      the destruction of life for its performance. Nîlakantha also has a different reading from Arguna Misra, which means ‘are
      replenished’ instead of ‘ support.’ And the three channels are, according to Nîlakantha, the Samskâras, or effects of previous
      actions of piety or impiety.
7   Coupled=always existing in association with one another; serving=being necessary to the operations of one another;
     depending=supporting one another like three staves, says Nîlakantha; upholding, says Arguna Misra, as the total absence
     of one would lead to the absence of the others also; attending= becoming subordinate to whichever of them is dominant for
     the time being; joined=so as to become one organic whole. Cf. as to all this, Yoga-sűtra II, 18, and commentary, p. 101;
     Sâńkhya-kârikâ, Kârikâ 12, with Vâkaspati Misra’s comments on it.

 319     CHAPTER XXI, II.

are made up of the three qualities. Goodness is the match of darkness, and passion is the match of goodness; and goodness is also the match of passion, and darkness the match of goodness. Where darkness is restrained, passion there prevails. Where passion is restrained, goodness there prevails 1. Darkness should be understood to consist in obscurity. It has three qualities 2, and is called delusion. Its characteristic is also impiety, and it is constant in sinful actions. This is the nature of darkness; it also appears combined with others. Passion is said to consist in activity, and is the cause of successive  3 acts. When it prevails, its characteristic, among all beings, appears to be production 4. Light, lightness 5, faith, such is stated to be the nature of goodness prevailing among all beings, as accepted by good men. The true nature of their characteristics, in aggregation and separation, will now be stated together with the reasons; learn those accurately. Delusion, ignorance,
1   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 108, and the quotation in the Sáńkhyatattvakaumudî, p. 64.
2   I. e. characteristics, viz, obscurity (which seems to stand for ignorance), delusion (which is false knowledge), and impiety (doing
     that which is known to be sinful and wrong).
3   The original means, according to Nîlakantha, wrong, unlawful conduct. As to all this cf. Sânti Parvan (Moksha), chap. St. 29.
4    I.e. apparently perpetually doing something. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 108.
5   Cf. as to this, and generally also, Sâńkhya-kârikâ 13, and commentary of Vâkaspati Misra (p. 64). The blazing upwards of fire
      is said to illustrate the lightness of the quality of goodness which belongs to fire.


320     ANUGÎTÂ.

want of liberality, indecision about actions 1, sleep, haughtiness 2, fear, avarice, grief, finding fault with good acts, want of memory 3, immaturity of intellect , nihilism 4 violation of the rules of conduct, want of discrimination 3, blindness, behaviour of the lowest 5 quality, pride of performance without actual performance, pride of knowledge without actual knowledge, unfriendliness, evil disposition, want of faith, deluded convictions, want of straightforwardness, want of knowledge 6, sinful action, want of knowledge of the subtle principle , stolidity 7, lassitude, want of self-restraint, going into inferior ways; all these qualities, O Brâhmanas! are celebrated as being dark. And whatever other states of mind, connected with delusion, are found in various places in this world, all these are dark qualities. Constant talk in disparagement of gods, Brâhmanas and Vedas, want of liberality, vanity, delusion 8, anger, want of forgiveness likewise, and also animosity
1    According to Gîtâ, p. 108, doing nothing—stolid laziness—is a mark of darkness. Cf. generally on this passage Gîtâ, pp. 107, 118,
      124 seq.; Maitrî, p. 49.
2    The same word as at Gîtâ, pp. 116, 125 (headstrong in the latter passage should have been haughty). Cf. as to the word,
      Khândogya, p. 383.
3    Cf. Gîtâ, p. 51.
4   The opposite of the belief mentioned at Gîtâ, p. 226.
5   The same word as at Gîtâ, p. 109. But the commentators render it here by himsra, i.e. destructive.
6   I am not sure about the original word here, and the word next but one after this. The latter Arguna Misra renders by
     sűkshmatattvâvedanam, which I have translated above in the text. The former seems to mean general unintelligence.
7   Heaviness and dulness, induced by indolence, &c., Nîlakantha
. Lassitude is drooping from despondency. Going into inferior
     ways, Arguna Misra says, means falling into the inferior castes; Nîlakantha says it means love for base actions.
8   Not being cognisant of one’s own shortcomings, Arguna Misra.

 321    CHAPTER XXI, 18.

towards people, this is considered to be dark conduct. Whatever vain 1 actions there are , and whatever vain gifts, and vain eating, that is considered to be dark conduct. Reviling, and want of forgiveness, animosity, vanity, want of faith also, this is considered to be dark conduct. And whatever such people there are in this world, doers of sinful acts, who break through all regulations, they are all held to be dark. I will state the wombs appointed for these men of sinful actions. They go to the hell, namely the brute species, to be born in the lower hell 2; or become the immovable entities 3, animals, beasts of burden, demons, and serpents, and worms, insects, birds, and also creatures born from eggs, and all quadrupeds, and idiots, deaf and dumb men, and whatever others are attacked by diseases generated by sin 4. These dark, evil-conducted men, who are sunk in darkness, who bear the marks of their own actions, the current of whose thoughts is downwards 5, sink into darkness. I will now proceed to state their improvement and ascent; how, becoming men of meritorious actions, they attain to the worlds of those who perform good acts 6. Resorting to a contrary 7 course of life , and growing old in good actions 8, they exert
1   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 83.
2   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 116.
3   Such as trees and so forth, which are also forms of life.
4   This is alluded to in some Smritis too. And cf. Khândogya, p. 358, and the quotation in the commentary on Sâńkhya-sűtra
      V, 122.
5   Such, says Nîlakantha, as to fit them for the nether world. See Tattvakaumudî, p. 113. As to marks, cf. p. 239 supra.
6   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 130.
7   I. e. contrary to that already described as dark.
8   Nîlakantha renders this to mean ‘destroyed for Agnihotra and such ceremonies,’ like the goat referred to above at p. 290.

322     ANUGÎTÂ.

themselves, and through the ceremonies performed for them by benevolent Brâhmanas devoted to their own duties, they go upwards to the same world as the Brâhmanas—the heaven of the gods. Such is the Vedic text. Resorting to a contrary 1 course
of life , and growing old in their own duties, they become men in this world whose nature is to return 2. Coming to a sinful womb,
as Kândâlas 3, or deaf, or lisping men, they attain to higher and higher castes in order; going beyond the Sűdra womb, and beyond whatever other dark qualities there are which abide in the quality of darkness 4 in the current of this world. Attachment to objects of desire is laid down to be the great delusion. There, sages and saints and gods become deluded, wishing for pleasure. Darkness 5, delusion, the great delusion, the great obscurity called anger, and death the blinding obscurity; anger is called the great obscurity. I have now duly described to you, O Brâhmanas! this quality of darkness, in full and accurately with reference to
1   See note 7 on last page. The sequence of ideas seems not to be properly brought out here. In the course of transmigration after
     their course of conduct is altered they become men, and then proceed to heaven. This seems the real sense here.
2   To return to life and death, and so on, until they fit themselves for final emancipation. Cf. Âpastamba II, 5, 11, 10—11.
3   Cf. Khândogya, p. 359.
4   This is not very clear, and the commentators give but little help. The meaning probably is, that they gradually, in course of
      improvement, cross beyond the Sűdra caste, and all those qualities or tempers of mind, and so forth, which have been stated
      to appertain to the quality of darkness.
5   Cf. Sâńkhya-kârikâ, pp. 47, 48, and Vâkaspati’s comment. There these are identified with the ‘afflictions’ of the
     Yoga-sâstra—ignorance, self-consciousness, affection, aversion, persistent attachment, and they are five divisions of false
      knowledge, or the quality of darkness, as it is here called. See, too, Svetâsvatara (comm.), p. 284.

 323     CHAPTER XXII, 5.

its nature, and also its qualities, and also its source. Who, indeed, understands this properly; who, indeed, perceives this properly? The definition of the essence of darkness is, that one sees the real in what is unreal. The qualities of darkness have been described to you in many ways. And darkness in its higher and lower 1 forms has been accurately stated. The man who always understands these qualities gets rid of all dark qualities.


Brahman said:

O best of men ! I will explain to you accurately the quality of passion. Learn, O noble ones! the action of the quality of passion. Injuring others beauty 2, toil, pleasure and pain, cold and heat, power 2, war, peace, argument, repining 3, endurance, strength, valour, frenzy, wrath, exercise and quarrel too, vindictiveness, desire, backbiting, battle, the thought that this or that is mine, preservation 4, slaughter, bonds, affliction, buying and selling, touching 5 other people’s weak points, by cutting, breaking, piercing; fierceness and cruelty, vilifying, pointing out others’ weaknesses, thinking of this world, harbouring evil thoughts, animosity, abuse,
1   Generally and specifically, says Arguna Misra.
2   Arguna Misra says these mean pride of beauty and pride of power respectively. Cf. as to this list generally, Maitrî, pp. 50, 51.
3   Cf. Sanatsugâtîya, p.168.
4   I presume this means solicitude for preserving what one has got. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 48.
5   Literally, piercing. ‘Cutting, breaking, piercing,’ further on, seems to indicate the greater or less offensiveness of the operation of
     ‘touching others’ weak points.’


324     ANUGÎTÂ.

uttering falsehoods, bad 1 gifts, doubt, boasting, censure, praise, laudation 2, prowess, defiance, attendance on another, obedience 3, service, harbouring desire, management 4, policy, heedlessness, contumely, belongings 5, and the various decorations which prevail in this world, for men, for women, for living creatures, for articles, and for houses, vexation, and also want of faith, vows and regulations 6, and actions with expectations, and the various acts of public charity 7, the ceremony of Svâhâ, the ceremony of Svadhâ, the ceremony of Vashat 8, salutation, both officiating at sacrifices and imparting instruction, and also sacrificing and study, gifts and acceptance of gifts, expiations, auspicious rites, the wish ‘this may be mine and that may be mine,’ affection generated by the qualities 9, treachery and likewise deception, disrespect and respect, theft, slaughter, disgust, vexing oneself , wakefulness, ostentation, haughtiness, and attachment also, devotion, pleasure and delight, gambling, common scandal, association with women,
1   I. e. to undeserving persons, Arguna Misra. Probably it includes the other defects also pointed out at Gîtâ, p. 820. As to doubt,
      see Gîtâ, p. 63.
2   The one is attributing merits which do not exist, the other is merely parading merits which do exist.
3   Arguna Misra takes this literally to mean ‘wish to hear.’
4   Cleverness in worldly affairs, Nîlakantha.
5   Cf. Gîtâ, passim, and see also Yoga-sűtras II, 30, and commentary (pp. 127—129, Calc. ed.)
6   Fasts and other observances for special benefits.
7   E. g. digging tanks and wells, &c.
8   Vashat and Svâhâ indicate offerings to gods, Svadhâ to the manes. See Brihadâranyaka, p. 982, and Mândukya (Gaudapâda
     Kârikâ) p. 443, and commentaries there.
9   I presume this means attachment to the operations of the qualities. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 48. As to the wish just before, see Gîtâ, pp. 115, 116

 325     CHAPTER XXIII, 3.

devotion to dancing, and instrumental or vocal music, all these qualities, O Brâhmanas! are described as passionate. The men who meditate on past, present, and future entities in this world 1, who are always devoted to the triad—piety, wealth, and lust also 2_ who acting under the impulse of desires exult on the success of all their desires, these men, who are enveloped by passion, have their currents downwards 3. Born again and again in this world, they rejoice 4, and wish for the fruit appertaining to the life after death 5 and that appertaining to this world also. They give and receive, and make Tarpana 6, and also sacrifice. The qualities of passion have been described to you in many ways, and the action of the quality has also been stated accurately. The man who always understands these qualities, gets rid of all passionate qualities.


Brahman said:

Now I shall proceed to describe the third—the best—quality, beneficial to all creatures, and unblamable, the duty of the good. Joy 7, pleasure, nobility, enlightenment and happiness also, absence of stinginess, absence of fear, contentment, faith, forgiveness, courage, harmlessness, equability, truth, straightforwardness, absence of wrath, absence of calumnia-
1   I.e. who are always thinking of what they have done and what they have to do, and so forth. Cf. Gitâ, pp. 115, ii6.
2   And not that which is higher than these, viz, final emancipation.
3   See p. 321 and note 5 there.
4   Cf. inter alia, Gîtâ, p. 48.
5   Viz, heaven. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 48.
6   I.e. offerings to the manes.
7   Cf. p. 300 supra, and Sânti Parvan (Moksha), chap. 194 St. 34; chap. 219, st. 36. For nobility, Arguna Misra has manifestation of joy.

326     ANUGÎTÂ.

tion, purity, dexterity, valour. He who possesses the piety of concentration of mind, holding knowledge to be vain 1, good conduct vain, service vain, and labour vain, he attains the highest in the next world. Devoid of (the notion that this or that is mine, devoid of egoism, devoid of expectations, equable everywhere, not full of desires, to be such is the eternal duty of the good. Confidence, modesty 2, forgiveness, liberality, purity, freedom from laziness, absence of cruelty, freedom from delusion, compassion to all creatures, absence of backbiting, joy, contentment, joviality, humility, good behaviour, purity in all action for acquiring tranquillity 3, righteous feelings, emancipation 4, indifference 5, life as a Brahmakârin, abandonment on all hands, freedom from the notion that this or that is mine, freedom from expectations 6, unbroken piety 7, holding that gifts are vain, sacrifices vain, learning vain, vows vain, receipt of gifts vain, piety vain, penance vain. Those talented Brâhmanas in this world, whose conduct is of this description, who adhere to the quality of goodness, abiding in the seat of the Brahman 8, perceive everything aright. Getting rid of all
1   Such is Nîlakantha reading, and he takes knowledge to mean mere knowledge derived from books, &c. Arguna Misra has a
     different reading for vain, which he interprets to mean ‘wish for fruit.’
2   See Sanatsugâtiya, p. 162.
3   I. e. pure and straightforward conduct in the performance of whatever is done for attaining final emancipation.
4   Of other people from sorrow, Arguna Misra.
5    The state of being unconcerned, udâstîna, Nîlakantha.
6   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 6o, inter alia.
7   Arguna Misra understands the original here to mean ‘not being under the control of another.’
8   I. e. the source of the Vedas, according to Nîlakantha. The supreme is called Brahmayoni, the original word here, at Svetâsvatara,
     p. 354, where Brahman is rendered to mean Prakriti by Sańkara. See Sanatsugâtîya, p. 186, note 6,and Taittirtîya-âranyaka,
     p. 894. As to the probable sense here, see p. 339, note 2 infra.

 327     CHAPTER XXIII, 14.

sins, and free from grief, those talented men reach heaven, and create various bodies 1. The power of governing, self-restraint, minuteness 2, these those high souled ones make for themselves by the operations of their own minds like the gods dwelling in heaven. They are said to have their currents upwards 3, and to be gods, and of the quality of goodness 4 and having gone to heaven they verily change in various ways, by means of nature 5. They obtain and divide 6 whatever they desire. Thus, O chiefs of the twice- born! have I described to you the conduct of the quality of goodness. Understanding this according to rule, one obtains whatever one desires. The qualities
1   I.e. for themselves. Cf. p. 345 infra; Yoga-sűtras, p. 227; and Brihadâranyaka, p. 849.
2   These include, according to Nîlakantha, the other qualities of the same class unnamed here, for which see Yoga-sűtra III, 44
     (p. 207). The power of governing, i. e. producing, destroying, or combining worldly objects as one pleases ; self-restraint. i. e.
     in the presence of tempting objects; minuteness = power of becoming as minute as one pleases. The other qualities are lightness,
     largeness, and heaviness; power of attracting everything so as to be near oneself (e. g. touching the moon with the finger), power
     of obtaining one’s wish.
3   Cf. p. 321 supra and note 5. Arguna Misra, and Nîlakantha also, here render it by ‘those who go upwards.’ As to which, see Gîtâ,
 p. 109.
4   Cf. for this sense, which is given by Arguna Misra, Sâńkhya-sâra, p. 19.
5   Nîlakantha says this means that they change their minds for purposes of enjoyment by means of the impression of previous
     enjoyments. The changes, however, seem to be those above referred to—minuteness, &c., and the acquisition of other bodies.
    As to nature, cf. Gîtâ pp. 58 and 112, with the correction made at p. 318 supra.
6 This is not quite clear. Does it mean distribute among themselves or others?


328     ANUGÎTÂ.

of goodness have been specifically described, and the operation of the qualities has been accurately stated. The man who always understands these qualities, enjoys the qualities 1, but is not attached to the qualities.


Brahman said:

The qualities cannot be explained altogether distinctly from one another. Passion, goodness, and darkness likewise are seen mixed up with one another . They are attached to one another, they feed on one another. They all depend on one another, and likewise follow one another 2 There is no doubt of this, that as long 3 as there is goodness so long darkness exists. And as long as goodness and darkness, so long is passion said to exist here. They perform their journey together, in union, and moving about collectively. For they act with cause or without cause 4, moving in a body. Of all these acting with one another, but differing in development, the increase and diminution will now be stated. Where darkness is increased, abiding 5 in the lower entities, there passion should be understood to be little, and goodness likewise to be less. Where
1    Cf. Gîtâ inter alia p. 104.
2    Cf. p. 318 supra.
3    So Arguna Misra. Nîlakantha says on this, ‘However much goodness may be increased, it is still held in check by darkness, and
      thus there is the continual relation of that which checks and that which is checked between the three qualities; hence they are
      alike. So also passion being increased, holds goodness and darkness in check. The sense seems to be that the qualities dominate
      all in this world and exist together though varying in strength’ (Gîtâ, p.7).
4   I. e. spontaneously, Arguna Misra. Cf. Sânti Parvan (Moksha), chap. 294, St. 35.
5   It is in the lower species that darkness is predominant.

 329     CHAPTER XXIV, 14.

passion is developed, abiding in those of the middle current 1, there darkness should be understood to be little, and goodness likewise to be less. And where goodness is developed, abiding in those of the upward current 2, there darkness should be understood to be little, and passion likewise to be less 3. Goodness is the cause of the modifications in the senses, and the enlightener 4. For there is no other higher duty laid down than goodness. Those who adhere to the ways of goodness go up; the passionate remain in the middle; the men of the quality of darkness, being connected with the lowest quality, go down 5. The three qualities abide in the three castes thus: darkness in the Sűdra, passion in the Kshatriya, and the highest, goodness, in the Brâhmana 6. Even from afar 7, darkness, goodness, and passion also, are seen to have been together and moving about collectively. We have never heard of them as existing separately. Seeing the sun rising, evildoers are alarmed, and travellers, suffering trouble from the heat, feel the warmth. The sun is goodness developed, evil-doers likewise are darkness, and the heat to the travellers is said to be a property of
1   I. e. the human species, Arguna Misra. Cf. GM, p. 109.
2   See Gîtâ, p. 109, also p. 327 supra. In his Sâńkhyatattva-kaumudî, Vâkaspati Misra applies the epithet to Yogins (see p. 13 of
     Târânâth’s edition, and the editor’s note there).
3   Cf. GM, p. io8.
4   Cf. Gîtâ, p. io8. The modifications of the senses constituting perception by them is an operation of the quality of goodness.
     This seems to be the meaning of the text; as to this, cf. Tattva-kaumudî, p. 14 (Târânâth’s edition).
5   See Gîtâ, p. 109; the words are nearly identical.
6   Cf. Sânti Parvan (Moksha), chap. 188, st. 15. The Vaisya is omitted here.
7   I. e. Arguna Misra says, even after much observation.


330     ANUGÎTÂ.

passion 1. The light in the sun is goodness; the heat is the quality of passion; and its eclipse on the Parvan 2 days must be understood to be of the quality of darkness. So in all shining bodies, there exist three qualities. And they act by turns in the several places in several ways. Among immovable entities, darkness is in the form of their belonging to the lower species; the qualities of passion are variable; and the oleaginous property is of the quality of goodness 3. The day should be understood to be threefold, the night is stated to be threefold, and likewise months, half-months, years, seasons, and the conjunctions 4. Threefold are the gifts given 5, threefold the sacrifices performed, threefold are the
1   This illustrates the existence of the qualities as one body. Even the enlightening sun, which embodies the quality of goodness,
      produces effects which belong to the other qualities. The fear and sorrow which evil-doers, that is thieves, feel, is an effect of the
      rising of the sun, which appertains to the quality of darkness, and the heat as being the cause of vexation and consequent
      delusion to travellers, appertains to the quality of passion.
2   I. e. the days of the moon’s conjunction or opposition.
3   I understand this to mean that in the ‘immovable entities’ the three qualities co-exist; the birth in the lower species is an effect of
     darkness; the variable qualities, viz, the heat, &c., as Arguna Misra says, are the properties of passion; and the oleaginous
     properties among them appertain to goodness, as, says Arguna Misra, they are sources of pleasure (cf. Gîtâ, p. 118). Nîlakantha
     says, ‘Immovable entities being very unintelligent, darkness is very much developed among them,’ but this last, as an
     interpretation of tiryagbhâvagata, appears to me to be alike unwarranted and inappropriate here.
4   Does this mean the period about the close of one and beginning of another yuga or age? That is the only sense ejusdem generis
     with the words preceding it that I can think of; yet the jump from years to yuga-sandhis is a long one.
5   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 120. With reference to some, at least, of the things enumerated here, the division would be rather fanciful.


 331    CHAPTER XXIV, 25.

worlds, threefold the gods, threefold the departments of knowledge, and threefold the path 1 The past, the present, and the future; piety, wealth, and lust; the Prâna, the Apâna, and the Udâna; these are the three qualities. And whatever there is in this world, all that is made of these three qualities 2. The three qualities—goodness, passion, and darkness also—are always acting unperceived. The creation of the qualities is eternal. Darkness, unperceived, holy 3, constant, unborn, womb, eternal, nature, change 4, destruction, Pradhâna, production and absorption, not developed, not small, unshaking, immovable, immutable, existent and also non-existent 5 — all these, the unperceived, consisting of the three qualities, is said to be. These names should be learnt by men who ponder on matters relating to the self. He who understands correctly all the names of the unperceived, and the qualities, and its pure operations, he, freed from the body, understanding the truth about (all) distinctions, and being free from all misery, is released from all qualities.
1   See these three mentioned at Khândogya, pp. 340—359. As to departments of knowledge, cf. Gîtâ, p. 84; Arguna Misra reads,
     ‘threefold the Vedas.’
2   The universe is all developed from the Prakriti, which is merely the three ‘qualities in equilibrium.’ Cf. Sâńkhya-sűtra I, 61.
     Because it gives final emancipation to one who discriminates it from Purusha, Arguna Misra. Cf. Sâńkhya-sűtra II, i seq., and
     Sâńkhya-kârikâ, p. 56 seq., and commentary. For another list of names of Prakriti, see Svetâsvatara (comm.), p. 283.
4   Nature is not a development from anything, and hence is called avikriti in Sânkhya-kârikâ 3; but ‘change’ here probably means
     the whole aggregate of Vikritis, ‘changes’ or developments, which make up Prakriti; or by a different derivation it may, perhaps,
     also mean that from which all development or change takes place.
5   See Sâńkhya-sűtra V, 52—56; and also I, 26, and commentary here. The Vedântins speak of Mâyâ—which answers to what the
      Sâńkhyas call Prakriti (see Svetâsvatara, p. 340, and Sâńkhya-sűtra I, 69, and commentary there)—as


332     ANUGÎTÂ.


Brahman. said:

From the unperceived was first produced the great self 1, of great intelligence, the source of all qualities 2; it is said to be the first creation. That great self is signified by these synonymous terms—the great self, intelligence, Vishnu 3, Gishnu, Sambhu, the valiant, the understanding, means of knowledge, means of perception, and likewise cognition, courage, memory. Knowing that great self, a learned Brâhmana comes not by delusion. It has hands and feet on all sides 4, it has eyes, heads, and faces on all sides; it stands pervading everything in the world 5. The being of great power is stationed in the heart of all. Minuteness 6, lightness, the power of obtaining everything are his ; he is the governor, the light, inexhaustible. Now people who comprehend the understanding, and who are always possessed of a good heart, who practise meditation, who are constant at concentration of mind, who are true to their promises, and whose senses are subdued, who are possessed of knowledge, who are not avaricious, who have subdued wrath, whose minds are clear, who are talented, who are devoid of the thought that this or that is mine, who are devoid of egoism,
1   I. e. the understanding, on which see Sâńkhya-sűtra I, 62—64. It is called being (Purusha) further on, as it dwells in the body (Puri).
2   I. e. of the effects of all qualities (namely, the universe; cf. Gîtâ, p. 48), Nîlakantha.
3   I. e. all-pervading, Arguna Misra. On the whole passage, see Sâńkhya-sâra, pp. 15, 16, and note 3 on page 333 infra.
4   As, says Arguna Misra, it is the source of all activity.
5   The words are identical with those at Gîtâ, p. 203.
6   See p. 327 supra.

 333     CHAPTER XXVI, 2.

these being emancipated, attain greatness 1. And the talented man who understands that high and holy goal, the great self 2, he among all people comes not by delusion. The self-existent Vishnu is the Lord in the primary creations 3. And he who thus knows the lord lying in the cave 4, the transcendent, ancient being, of universal form, and golden 5, the highest goal of those possessed of understanding, that talented man, abides transcending the understanding 6.


Brahman said:

That Mahat which was first produced, is afterwards called egoism; when it is born as the feeling itself 7 I, that is said to be the second creation. That egoism is stated to be the source of all entities 8 ,
1   I.e., says Arguna Misra, the world of the understanding. Does this mean the world of Hiranyagarbha? The understanding is said
     to be the ‘subtle body’ of Hiranyagarbha (Vedânta Paribhâshâ, p. 46). Probably the reference spiritually interpreted is to the state
     in which egoism and all its products are non-existent.
2   Literally, ‘the high and holy passage to the great self.’
3   The Mahat first manifests itself as Vishnu before it manifests itself as Brahman or Siva (Sâńkhya-sâra, p. 16), hence he is said to
     be the Lord in the primary creation. It may be added, that in the Sâńkhya-sâra where this passage is quoted the original word
     rendered ‘cognition’ above (khyâti) does not occur, but in lieu of it occurs Brahman. The sentence ‘And the talented man’ &c. is
     also wanting there.
4   I. e. the understanding. See Sańkara on Svetâsvatara, p. 329; Katha, p. 100.
5   Source of enlightenment, Arguna Misra. Cf. Mundaka, pp. 303— 308 (gloss).
6   I.e. attaching himself to the Purusha, as the never-changing reality, and rising above Prakriti and its manifestations.
7   I. e. when the Mahat develops into the feeling of self-consciousness—I—then it assumes the name of egoism. [See: S.D. i, p75.]
8   See on this Sânkhya-sâra, Hall’s Introd., p. 31 note.


334     ANUGÎTÂ.

that from which the changes take place 1; it is full of light, the supporter of consciousness; it is that from which the people are produced, the Pragâpati. It is a deity, the producer of the deities, and of the mind; it is the creator of the three worlds. That which feels 2 thus—’ I am all this ‘—is called by that name. That eternal world is for those sages who are contented with knowledge relating to the self; who have pondered on the self, and who are perfected by sacred study and sacrifice. By 3 consciousness of self one enjoys the qualities; and thus that source of all entities, the producer of the entities, creates them and as that from which the changes take place, it causes all this to move; and by its own light, it likewise charms the world.
1   So Arguna Misra. Nîlakantha says it means ‘born from the change, or development, viz. Mahat.’ The Sâńkhya-sâra, p. 17,
     however, shows it means ‘appertaining to the quality of goodness.’ See also Sâńkhya-kârikâ 25, and commentary there, which
     is of great help here. The sense is this: Egoism is of three descriptions; it appertains to the quality of goodness, and as such is the
     creator of the deities and mind, the deities being those presiding over the ten senses (cf. Sâńkhya-sâra, p. 17); it is full of light, or
     appertains to the quality of passion (cf. ibid.), and as such imparts to the other two qualities their virtue of activity cf.
     Sâńkhya-kârikâ commentary, p .91, Târânâth’s ed.); it is also of the quality of darkness, and as such the producer of the triple
     world (see ibid.). See Sâńkhya-sűtra II, 17, 18, and comment, where a view somewhat different in one or two details is stated.
2   Sâńkhya-sâra, p. i6; Sâńkhya-kârikâ 24, p. 89 (Târânâth's ed.). Arguna Misra says that the words Ahańkâra &c. are here
     explained; qualities here means objects, as at Gîtâ, p. 55. The meaning of the first clause is, that the feeling that the objects are for
     oneself, and therefore enjoying them, gives the name of Ahańkâra to the principle in question; its creation of all the elements gives
     it the name of Bhűtâdi. It is called Vaikârika, as the cause of the various activities and developments going on. The last clause
     seems to be an explanation of the epithet Taigasa, also applied to egoism.

 335     CHAPTER XXVII, 7.


Brahman said:

From egoism, verily, were the five great elements born—earth, air, space, water, and light as the fifth. In these five great elements, in the operations of perceiving sound, touch, colour, taste, and smell, creatures are deluded 1. When, at the termination of the destruction of the great elements, the final dissolution approaches, O talented one! a great danger for all living beings arises 2 . Every entity is dissolved into that from which it is produced. They are born one from the other, and are dissolved in the reverse order 3. Then when every entity, movable or immovable, has been dissolved, the talented men who possess a good memory 4 are not dissolved at all. Sound, touch, and likewise colour, taste, and smell as the fifth; the operations connected with these have causes 5, and are inconstant, and their name is delusion. Caused by the production of avarice 6, not different from one another 7, and insignificant 8 connected with flesh and blood, and depending upon one another,
1   The contact of the objects of sense with the senses is the source of delusion.
2   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 207, and note I there.
3   Cf. Sâńkhya-sűtra I, 121, and p. 387 infra.
4   I. e. knowledge of the truth, Arguna Misra.
5   Hence, as they have a beginning, they also must have an end, and hence they are inconstant.
6   This and following epithets expand the idea of inconstancy.
7   Being all in substance connected with the Prakriti, the material world, so to say.
8   Containing no reality, Nîlakantha.

336    ANUGÎTÂ.

excluded from the self 1, these are helpless and powerless. The Prâna and the Apâna, the Udâna, the Samâna, and the Vyâna,
these five winds also are joined to the inner self 2, and together with speech, mind, and understanding make the eight constituents
of the universe 3. He whose skin, nose, ear, eye, tongue, and speech are restrained, and whose mind is pure, and understanding unswerving 4, and whose mind is never burnt by these eight fires 5, he attains to that holy Brahman than which nothing greater exists. And the eleven organs, which are stated as having been produced from egoism—these, O twice-born ones ! I will describe specifically. The ear, the skin, the two eyes, the tongue, the nose also as the fifth, the two feet, the organ of excretion, and the organ of generation, the two hands, and speech as the tenth; such is the group of organs, the mind is the eleventh. This group one should subdue first, then the Brahman shines before him . Five of these are called the organs of perception, and five the
1   Nîlakantha apparently takes the original here to mean of gross nature, not subtle, such as anything connected with the self
    would be. They are helpless and powerless without support from other principles, and mainly the self.
2   He here states what is more closely connected with the self, and, as Nîlakantha puts it, accompanies the self till final emancipation.
     The inner self Nîlakantha takes to mean the self associated with egoism or self-consciousness.
3   Nîlakantha cites certain texts to show that the perceptive senses work only through the mind, and that the objects of the senses are
    produced from the senses, and hence the universe, he says, is constituted of the eight enumerated above.
4   I. e. from the truth.
5   I.e. vexed by the operations of any of these.


 337     CHAPTER XXVII, 24.

organs of action. The five beginning with the ear are truly said to be connected with knowledge. And all the rest are without distinction connected with action. The mind should be understood to be among both 1, and the understanding is the twelfth. Thus have been stated the eleven organs in order. Understanding these 2, learned men think they have accomplished everything. I will now proceed to state all the various organs. Space 3 is the first entity; as connected with the self it is called the ear; likewise as connected with objects it is sound; and the presiding deity there is the quarters. The second entity is air; it is known as the skin as connected with the self; as connected with objects it is the object of touch; and the presiding deity there is lightning. The third entity is said to be light; as connected with the self it is called the eye; next as connected with objects it is colour; and the presiding deity there is the sun. The fourth entity should be understood to be water; as connected with the self it is called the tongue; as connected with objects it is taste; and the presiding deity there is Soma. The fifth entity is earth; as connected with the self it is the nose; as connected with objects likewise it is smell; and the presiding deity there is the wind. Thus are the five entities stated to be divided among the three . I will now proceed to state all the various organs.
1   Cf. Sâńkhya-kârikâ 27; Sânkhya-sâra, p. 17.
2   Cf. Katha, p. 348.
3   Cf. Lalita Vistara (translated by Dr. R. Mitra), p. 11 The above sentences show the entities in the three different aspects
     mentioned, which correspond to each other; the ear is the sense, that which is connected with the self; sound is the object
     of that sense, as connected with the external world; and the quarters, Dik, are the deities presiding over the senses; as to this cf.
     Sâńkhya-sâra, p. 17, and Vedânta Paribhâshâ, p. 45, which show some discrepancies. The distinctions of Adhyâtma &c. are to
     be found in the Upanishads; cf. inter alia, Khândogya, p. 227, and cf. Gîtâ, p. 77.

338     ANUGÎTÂ.

As connected with the self the feet are mentioned by Brâhmanas, who perceive the truth; as connected with objects it is motion; the presiding deity there is Vishnu. The Apâna wind, the motion of which is downward, as connected with the self, is called the organ of excretion; as connected with objects it is excretion 1; and the presiding deity there is Mitra. As connected with the self the generative organ is mentioned, the producer of all beings; as connected with objects it is the semen; and the presiding deity there is Pragâpati. Men who understand the Adhyâtma speak of the two hands as connected with the self; as connected with objects it is actions; and the presiding deity there is Indra. Then first, as connected with the self is speech which relates to all the gods; as connected with objects it is what is spoken; and the presiding deity there is fire. As connected with the self they mention the mind, which follows after the five entities 2; as connected with objects it is the mental operation; the presiding deity there is the moon. Likewise there is egoism, the cause of the whole course of worldly life, as connected with the self; as connected with objects, self-consciousness; the presiding deity there is Rudra. As connected with the self, they mention the understanding impelling the six senses 3;
1   As to the original word, cf. inter alia, Svetâsvatara, pp. 197—202.
2   This probably means the five senses which can perceive only when associated with the mind.
3   The understanding is called the charioteer at Katha, p. 111

 339     CHAPTER XXVII, 39.

as connected with objects that which is to be understood; and the presiding deity there is Brahman. There are three seats for all entities—a fourth is not possible—land, water, and space. And the mode of birth is fourfold. Those born from eggs, those born from germs, those born from perspiration, and those born from wombs—such is the fourfold mode of birth of the group of living beings 1 Now there are the inferior beings and likewise those moving in the air. Those should be understood to be born from eggs, as also all reptiles. Insects are said to be born from perspiration; and worms of the like description. This is said to be the second mode of birth, and inferior. Those beings, however, which are born after the lapse of some time, bursting through the earth, are said to be born from germs, O best of the twice-born! Beings of two feet or more than two feet, and those which move ‘crookedly, are the beings born from wombs. Understand about them also, O best of men! The eternal seat where the Brahman 2 is to be attained should be understood to be twofold—penance 3 and meritorious action. Such is the doctrine of the learned. Action should be understood to be of various 4
1   Cf. Khândogya, pp. 404—406, and glosses; Aitareya, p. 243; Vedânta Paribhâshâ, p. 47; Sâńkhya-sűtra V, 111; Manu I, Max,43 ;
     Muller’s note at p. 94 of his Khândogya in this series.
2   So Nîlakantha, but he also adds that this means birth as a Brâhmana, which seems to be quite wrong. Arguna Misra’s ‘means of
     acquiring Brahman’ is right.
3   I.e., I presume, ‘knowledge.’ Sańkara has so interpreted the word at Mundaka, p. 270, and Katha, p. 127, and elsewhere; and see
     Sanatsugâtîya, p. 166 supra.
4   Another reading is ‘of two kinds.’ But I prefer this, as three kinds are mentioned further on.


340     ANUGÎTÂ.

descriptions, namely sacrifice, gift at a sacrifice, and sacred study 1, for every one who is born 2. Such is the teaching of the ancients. He who duly understands this, becomes possessed of concentration of mind, O chief of the twice-born! and know, too, that he is released from all sins. Space 3 is the first entity; as connected with the individual self it is called the ear; as connected with objects likewise it is called sound; and the presiding deity there is the quarters. The second entity is air; as connected with the individual self it is called the skin; as connected with objects it is the object of touch; and the presiding deity there is the lightning. The third is called light; as connected with the individual self it is laid down to be the eye; next as connected with objects it is colour; the presiding deity there is the sun. The fourth should be understood to be water; as connected with the individual self it is stated to be the tongue; as connected with objects it should be understood to be taste; the presiding deity there is Soma. The fifth element is earth; as connected with the individual self it is called the nose; as connected with objects likewise it is called smell; the presiding deity there is Vâyu. Thus have I
1   Cf. as to this Khândogya, p. 136, which justifies our rendering, though the commentator Arguna Misra seems to understand the
     passage differently.
2   Arguna Misra seems to understand this to mean ‘twice-born.’
3   This is a repetition of what occurs at p. 337, and apparently is spurious. But two of the MSS., both those containing commentaries,
      contain the passage twice. One of the other MSS. omits the passage where it occurs before, and has it here. I think that the
      passage is in its place before, and probably interpolated here.

 341     CHAPTER XXVII, 49.

accurately described to you the creation 1 as connected with the individual self. A knowledge of this, O ye who understand piety! is here obtained by those who possess knowledge. One should place all these together, viz, the senses, the objects of the senses, and the five great elements, and hold them by the mind 2 When everything is absorbed into the mind, the pleasures of worldly life 3 are not esteemed. The learned men whose understandings are possessed of knowledge esteem the pleasure derived from that 4. Now 5 I shall proceed to describe that discarding of all entities by means gentle and hard 6, which produces attachment to subtle 7 (topics), and is sanctifying. The mode of conduct in which qualities are not treated as qualities 8, which is free from attachment, in which one lives alone 9, which is uninterrupted 10, and which is full of the Brahman  11 is called happiness dwelling in one aggregate 12.
1   I am not quite sure that this is a correct rendering. But I can think of none better, and the commentators afford no help.
2   Nîlakantha says, ‘Thinking that the great elements are not distinct from the senses, one should hold them absorbed in the mind.’
     Arguna Misra says, ‘In the mind as their seat they should be placed,’ as being not distinct from the mind, I presume. Cf. Katha, p. 148.
3   Literally, ‘birth.’
4   From knowledge, I presume. The commentators afford no help.
5   Arguna Misra’s text appears to commence a new chapter here.
6   Such as meditation or upâsana, and prânyama or restraint of life-winds respectively, Arguna Misra.
7   Cf. p. 310 supra.
8   I. e. bravery, learning, &c. are treated as not being merits, as they cause pride, &c., Nîlakantha.
9   I.e. in solitude, Nîlakantha; devoting oneself to the self only, Arguna Misra.
10  Or, says Nîlakantha, free from any belief in distinctions.
11   Another reading would mean ‘which exists among Brâhmanas.’
12   I. e. all collected together, I presume.

342     ANUGÎTÂ.

The learned man who absorbs objects of desire from all sides, as a tortoise draws in his limbs 1, and who is devoid of passion, and released from everything 2, is ever happy. Restraining objects of desire within the self 3, he becomes fit for assimilation with the Brahman 4, having his cravings destroyed, and being concentrated in mind, and friendly and affectionate 5 to all beings. The fire of the Adhyâtma 6 is kindled in a sage by his abandoning the country 7, and by the restraint of all the senses which hanker after objects of sense. As fire kindled with fuel shines forth with a great blaze, so the great self 8 shines forth through the restraint of the senses. When one with a tranquil self perceives all entities in one’s own heart, then being self-illumined 9, one attains to that which is subtler than the most subtle thing 10, and than which there is nothing higher. It is settled, that the body in which the colour11 is fire, the flowing 12
1   Cf. Gîtâ, pp. 50, 51, and Sânti Parvan (Moksha Dharma) I, 51, where the phrase is precisely the same as here.
2   I.e. from all bonds, I suppose. See p. 292 supra.
3   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 51.
4   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 110.
5   Cf. Gitâ, p. 68.
6   I.e. experience, Nîlakantha. It means direct perception of the relations between the supreme and individual self. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 111.
7   As opposed to forests. See Sanatsugâtîya, p. 259, note 9.
8   This must mean here the supreme self, apparently.
9   I. e. being devoted to the self only, Arguna Misra. The ordinary meaning of the word, however, is one who has direct experience
     or perception without the aid of senses, &c. Cf. Brihadâranyaka, p. 765, and Sârîraka Bhâshya, pp. 648, 784, &c.
10   Nîlakantha says, ‘The supreme Brahman which is subtler than the Brahman within the lotus-like heart.’
11   I.e. that which perceives colour, viz, the sense, Arguna Misra. This applies to the analogous words coming further on.
12   I.e. taste, says Arguna Misra, which seems to be more correct than Nîlakantha’s blood and such other liquid elements of the body.

 343     CHAPTER XXVII, 59.

element water, and the feeling of touch is air, the hideous holder of the mud 1 is earth, and likewise the sound is space; which is pervaded by disease and sorrow; which is surrounded by the five currents 2; which is made up of the five elements; which has nine passages 3 and two deities 4; which is full of passion; unfit to be seen 5; made up of three qualities and of three constituent elements 6 pleased with contacts 7; and full of delusion 8 —this same body, which is difficult to move in this mortal world, and which rests on the real entity 9, is the very wheel of time which rotates in this world 10 It is a great ocean, fearful and unfathomable, and is named 11 delusion. The world, together with the immortals, should cast it aside, curtail it,
1   I. e. the flesh, bone, and so forth, Nîlakantha; the mucus in the nose, Arguna Misra.
2   I. e. the senses. Cf. p. 238 supra, note 7.
3   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 65.
4   See Sanatsugâtîya, p. 187 supra.
5   As being unholy, Nîlakantha; as the bodies of Kândâlas &c. when seen are productive of sin, Arguna Misra. See p. 155 supra.
6   Viz. vâta, pitta, sleshma, or wind, bile, and phlegm. The dhâtus are sometimes spoken of as seven. See Yoga.sűtras, p. 192; Taitt.
     Âr. p.874, commentary, and p. 246 supra. See, too, however, Svetâsvatara, commentary, p. 287.
7  Which is delighted only by contact with food and so forth, not otherwise, Nîlakantha.
8   I. e. cause of delusion. The original word for ‘it is settled’ at the beginning of this sentence is otherwise rendered by Arguna Misra.
     He takes it to mean ‘in this light (namely, as above stated) should one contemplate the body.’ The other rendering is Nîlakantha's.
9   I. e. the self Arguna Misra; the understanding, Nîlakantha ; difficult to move = difficult to adjust if attacked by disease, &c.,
10  It is owing to this body that the self becomes limited by time, Arguna Misra. Nîlakantha’s gloss I do not follow.
11  I, e. characterised by delusion, Arguna Misra.

344     ANUGÎTÂ.

and restrain it 1. Desire, wrath, fear, avarice, treachery, and falsehood also, all these, which are difficult to get rid of, the good do get rid of by restraint of the senses 2 And he who in this world has vanquished the three qualities and the five constituent elements 3, obtains the highest 4 the infinite—seat in heaven. Crossing the river of which the five senses are the lofty banks, the agitation of mind 5 the mighty waters, and delusion the reservoir 6, one should vanquish both desire and wrath. Freed from all sins, he then perceives that highest principle , concentrating the mind within the mind 7, and seeing the self within the self 8. Understanding everything, he sees the self with the self in all entities as one 9, and also as various,
1  I am not sure about the meaning here. Arguna Misra says, (reading visriget, ‘send forth,’ for vikshipet, ‘cast aside,’) ‘send forth at
    the creation, curtail at the dissolution, and restrain at the final emancipation.’ The commentary reads rodhayet, which we have
    adopted above. The text in the same copy, however, is bodhayet. Arguna Misra adds, as far as I can make out from an incorrect
    copy: ‘as in this life everything is accomplished by these actions’ (namely, I suppose, the casting aside, &c.). Nîlakantha says, ‘This
    same thing is the cause of creation, destruction, and knowledge,’ reading bodhayet.
2   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 57.
3   I. e. the five great elements, as stated in Williams’ Dictionary, citing Yâgńavalkya III, 145. See Sânti Parvan (Moksha), chap. 182,
     St. 16; chap. 184, st.1.
4   I. e. the seat of the Brahman, Nîlakantha.
5   See Gîtâ, p. 66, where the word is the same, viz. Vega.
6   From which, namely, the river issues. Cf. for the whole figure, Sânti Parvan (Moksha), chap. 251, st. 12.
The mind= the lotus-like heart, Nîlakantha. Cf. Gîtâ. p. 79. Concentrating = withdrawing from external objects, &c.
8   I. e. in the body, Nîlakantha. See p. 248.
9   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 83, and note 4 there. Nîlakantha says, ‘as one, i. e. by direct perception of the unity of the individual and supreme, and as various,
     i. e. in the all-comprehending form.’


 345     CHAPTER XXVIII, 2.

changing from time to time 1. He can always perceive numerous bodies like a hundred lights from one light. He verily is Vishnu, and Mitra, and Varuna, Agni, and Pragâpati. He is the supporter, and the creator. He is the lord whose faces are in all directions 2 In him the great self—the heart of all beings—is resplendent. Him, all companies of Brâhmanas, and also gods, and demons, and Yakshas, and Pisâkas, and Pitris, and birds, and the bands of Rakshases, and the bands of Bhűtas 3, and also all the great sages, ever extol.


Brahman said:

Among men the royal Kshatriya is the middle 4 quality; among vehicles the elephant 5, and among denizens of the forest the lion; among all sacrificial animals the sheep, and among the dwellers in holes the snake; among cattle also the bull, and among
1   I.e. creating or acting, Arguna Misra. I think it probable that it was meant to go with the preceding words. See Gîtâ, p. 83 note;
     but, for this, ‘changing’ must be in the accusative. It is in the nominative. As the original stands, and on Arguna Misra’s
     interpretation, the sense seems to be that when he is about to engage in the work of creation, he can obtain as many bodies as he
     likes. Nîlakantha compares Khândogya, p. 526. And see pp. 249, 327 supra. Can always perceive=invariably obtains when he wishes.
2   Cf. Gîtâ, pp. 83, 93, and note 1 there.
3   Cf. Gîtâ, pp. 85, 118.
4   I. e. passion—that quality is dominant in the Kshatriya, Nîlakantha.
5   Commenting on Gîtâ V, 18 (p. 65) Sańkara calls the elephant atyantatâmasa, belonging entirely to the quality of darkness.

346     ANUGÎTÂ.

females a male 1. The Nyagrodha, the Gambu, the Pippala, and likewise the Sâlmali, the Sinsapâ, and the Meshasringa, and likewise the bamboo and willow 2 these are the princes among trees in this world, there is no doubt of that. The Himavat, the Pâriyâtra, the Sahya, the Vindhya, the Trikűtavat, the Sveta, the Nîla, the Bhâsa, and the Koshthavat mountain, the Mahendra, the Guruskandha, and likewise the Mâlyavat mountain, these are the princes among mountains 3. Likewise the Maruts are the princes among the Ganas; the sun is the prince among the planets, and the moon 4 among the Nakshatras; Yama is the prince among the Pitris and the ocean among rivers; Varuna is the king of the waters, and Indra is said to be the king of the Maruts. Arka is the king of hot bodies, and Indu is said to be the king of shining bodies. Fire is ever the lord of the elements , and Brihaspati of Brâhmanas; Soma is the lord of herbs, Vishnu is the chief among the strong; Tvashtri is the prince
1   As to the constructions here, cf. generally Gîtâ, p. 88, and see the remarks of Râmânuga and Sridhara on Gîtâ X, 21. The meaning
     here is, of course, the male is ruler over females.
2   I do not know what distinction is intended between these two. Generally kîkaka is used for the hollow bamboo, which whistles
     when the wind blows through it.
3   Some of these mountains are mentioned in Patańgali. See Introduction.
4   This list may be compared with that at Gîtâ, chapter X. Sometimes the same object occurs more than once with reference to more
      than one class; thus the moon occurs as lord of Nakshatras, of shining bodies, and of herbs—unless Soma there stands for the
     Soma plant. See Gîtâ, p. 113. Arguna Misra says expressly that the moon occurs more than once as the correlatives, the classes
     with reference to which she is mentioned, are different. In such cases I have kept the original names untranslated; Arka= sun;
5   Cf. Katha, p. 83.


 347     CHAPTER XXVIII, 16.

of the Rudras, and Siva is the ruler of all creatures; likewise, sacrifice of all initiatory ceremonies 1, and Maghavat 2 likewise of the gods; the north among the quarters, and among all vipras the powerful king Soma 3 Kubera is lord of all jewels, Purandara of all deities. Such is the highest creation among all entities. Pragâpati is lord of all peoples; and of all entities whatever I, who am full of the Brahman, and great, am lord. There is no higher being than myself or Vishnu. The great Vishnu full of the Brahman is the king of kings over all. Understand him to be the ruler, the creator, the uncreated Hari. For he is the ruler of men, Kinnaras, and Yakshas; of Gandharvas, snakes, and Rakshases; of gods, demons, and Nâgas. Among all those who are followed by men full of desires, the chief is 4 the great goddess Mâhesvarî, who has beautiful eyes. She is called Pârvatî. Know the goddess Umâ 5 to be the best and most holy of all females. Among women who are a source 6 of happiness, likewise, the brilliant 7 Apsarases are chief . Kings desire
1   This must mean, I presume, that the sacrifice is higher than the initiation, as male than female.
2   This is another repetition. Indra has been mentioned before, and Purandara is mentioned further on.
3   As to king Soma, see inter alia Brihadâranyaka, p. 237; Khândogya, p. 342, where Sańkara explains ‘king’ by adding ‘of
     Brâhmanas.’ Vipras=Brâhmanas.
4   I. e. Mâhesvarî is the most beautiful of womankind.
5   It is well known that Umâ, Pârvatt, Mâhesvarî are names of the consort of the third member of the Hindu Trinity; see Kena, p. 13,
     and Sańkara’s comment there. See, too, Muir, Sanskrit Texts, vol. iv, p. 421, and Taittirîya-âranyaka, p. 839.
6   The idea of ‘ source’ is supplied by Arguna Misra.
7   Literally, ‘rich.’ Arguna Misra paraphrases it by ‘Gyotishmatî.’ Nîlakantha’s explanation here is not quite clear.


348     ANUGÎTÂ.

piety; and Brâhmanas are the bridges 1 of piety. Therefore a king should always endeavour to protect the twice-born 2. Those kings in whose dominions good men lie low, lose all their qualifications 3, and go into wrong paths after death. But those high-souled kings in whose dominions good men are protected, rejoice in this world, and attain the infinite seat after death. Understand this, O chiefs of the twice-born! I shall now proceed to state the invariable characteristics of piety. Non-destruction is the highest piety 4, and destruction is of the nature of impiety. Enlightenment 5 is the characteristic of gods; action 6 the characteristic of men; sound is the characteristic of space; the sensation of touch is the characteristic of air ; colour is the characteristic of light; taste is the characteristic of water; the characteristic of earth, the supporter of all beings, is smell; words are the characteristic of speech 7 refined into vowels and consonants; the characteristic of mind is thought. Likewise as to what is described here as understanding, a deter-
1   I. e. instrumental in piety, or guides to piety. Cf. Svetâsvatara, p. 370; Mundaka, p. 297.
2   So literally, doubtless Brâhmanas only are intended here.
3   I. e., I presume, they lose all their merits, their good points are destroyed by this dereliction of duty.
4   Cf. p. 291 supra. Arguna Misra begins a fresh chapter with ‘I shall now,’ &c.
5   Knowledge of the truth, Arguna Misra.
6   I. e. action performed for the purpose of obtaining the fruit of it. The next five items refer to the five elements and their
     characteristic properties. Nîlakantha’s explanation, that all these are merely parallels not stated for their own relevancy
     here, but as illustrations, seems to be the only available one.
7   I. e. the learning of other people, Nîlakantha. The meaning seems to be that we know speech only in its manifestation in the form of words.


349    CHAPTER XXVIII, 29. 

mination is here formed by that understanding about objects which have been thought over by the mind 1, And there is no doubt of this that determination is the characteristic of the understanding. The characteristic of mind is meditation 2; and the characteristic of a good man is living unperceived 3. The characteristic of devotion is action 4; and knowledge the characteristic of renunciation. Therefore a man of understanding should practise renunciation, giving prominence to knowledge 5 . The renouncer possessed of knowledge attains the highest goal. And crossing beyond darkness, and transcending death and old age, he repairs to that which has no second 6. Thus have I duly spoken to you concerning the characteristic of piety. I will now proceed to explain properly the comprehension 7 of the qualities. As to the smell of the earth, verily, that is comprehended by the nose; and the wind 8 likewise residing in the nose is appointed 9 to the knowledge of smell. Taste10,
1   The text here is rather unsatisfactory; I have adopted that which I find in the copy containing Arguna Misra’s commentary.
2    Frequent pondering on matters learnt from Sâstras or common life, Nîlakantha. Why mind comes twice the commentators
      do not explain.
3   Does this refer to what is said at Sanatsugâtîya, p.159 ?
4   Devotion means here, as in the Gîtâ, action without desire of fruits. For action the word here is the same as at Gîtâ, p. 115, note 2.
5   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 52, note 7.
6   This is Arguna Misra’s interpretation, and appears to me to be correct. Nîlakantha’s is different, but seems to omit all account of
     abhyeti, ‘repairs.’
7  Arguna Misra’s interpretation seems to be different, but our copy is not quite intelligible.
8   See p. 337 supra. The wind is the presiding deity of the nasal organ.
9   I. e. that is its function. Arguna Misra says, ‘it is pondered on,’ which is not clear.
10  Cf. Gîtâ, p. 74, as to taste and water.

350    ANUGÎTÂ.

the essence of water, is always comprehended by the tongue. And the moon likewise, who resides in the tongue, is appointed to the knowledge of taste. The quality of light is colour, and that is comprehended by the eye; and the sun residing in the eye is appointed always to the knowledge of colour. The sensation of touch, belonging to the air, is perceived by the skin, and the wind 1 residing in the skin is always appointed to the knowledge of the objects of touch. The quality of space is sound, and that is comprehended by the ear. And all the quarters residing in the ear are celebrated as being appointed to the knowledge of sound. Thought is the quality of mind, and that is comprehended by the under-standing. The supporter of consciousness 2 residing in the heart is appointed to the knowledge of mind 3. The understanding is comprehended in the form of determination, and the Mahat 4 of knowledge. To this positive comprehension, the unperceived 5 is appointed , there is no doubt of that. The Kshetragńa, which is in its essence devoid of qualities and eternal, is not to be comprehended by any
1   This cannot be the presiding deity here, though one expects such deity to be mentioned.
2   The text of more than one of the lines here is rather doubtful; we follow Nîlakantha, who takes this to mean the gîva, the
      individual soul.
3   I. e. thought, as Nîlakantha points out.
4    Mahat is properly the same as buddhi, understanding, but as it is here mentioned separately, I suppose, it signifies Ahańkâra.
      Nîlakantha takes its operation, here called knowledge, to mean ‘the feeling I am,’ which agrees with our interpretation, for
      which some support is also to be derived from p. 333 supra.
5   I here follow Arguna Misra, though somewhat diffidently. The knowledge ‘this is I,’ and the knowledge ‘this is so and so and
      nothing else’ is presided over by the unperceived—the Prakriti.


 351     CHAPTER XXVIII, 42.

symbols. Therefore the characteristic of the Kshetragńa, which is void of symbols 1, is purely knowledge. The unperceived is stated to be the Kshetra 2 in which the qualities are produced and absorbed. And I always see, know, and hear it, though concealed. The Purusha knows it, therefore is he called Kshetragńa 3. And the Kshetragńa likewise perceives all the operations of the qualities 4. The qualities created again and again, do not know themselves 5, being non-intelligent, to be created and tied down to a beginning, middle, and end 6 Only the Kshetragńa attains, no one else attains, to the truth, which is great, transcendent, and beyond the qualities and the entities produced  7from the qualities. Hence a man who understands piety, abandoning qualities, and the creation 8, in this world, and transcending the qualities, and having his sins destroyed, then enters into the Kshetragńa. One who is free from the pairs of opposites, free from the ceremony of salutations, and
1   See Sanatsugâtîya, p. 146.
2   See Gîtâ, p. 102 Seq.
3   I. e. he who knows the Kshetra.
4   Enlightenment, activity, and delusion, Nîlakantha.
5   I. e. do not know the self, Nîlakantha; better, I think, the qualities do not know themselves, only the Kshetragńa knows them.’
     Cf. Sânti Parvan (Moksha Dharma), chap. 194, St. 41.
6   I. e. production, existence, and destruction, Nîlakantha. This must, however, mean their manifestation, continuance, and
     dissolution in any particular form. For the prakriti, which is made up of the three qualities, is beginningless. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 104.
7   I. e. the actual physical manifestations, as we may say, of the qualities.
8   The original, sattva, Nîlakantha renders by buddhi, and qualities by visible objects. In the familiar Sâńkhya phrase
      sattvapurushânyatâpratyaya sattva means creation, or what is other than purusha (cf. Sâńkhyatattvakaumudî, pp. 9—144).
      That is the meaning here. See too p. 371 infra, and Sânti Parvan (Moksha Dharma), chap. 194, St. 38 seq. and comments there.

352    ANUGÎTÂ.

from the svâhâ ceremony 1, who is unmoving, and homeless 2, is the Kshetragńa, he is the Supreme Lord.


Brahman said:

I will state truly all about that which has a beginning, middle, and end 3, and about the means for its comprehension, together with names and characteristics 4. It is stated that day was first and then night; that months have the bright 5 first, the Nakshatras Sravana 6 as the first among them ,and the seasons the winter as the first among them . The earth is the source 7 of smells, water of tastes, the light of the sun is the source of colours, the wind is stated to be the source of the feelings of touch; likewise space is the source of sound. These are the qualities of the elements. Now I shall proceed to state the highest and first of all entities. The sun is
I   See p. 324 supra.
2   See Gîtâ, p. 101. Unmoving probably means ‘not perturbed by the qualities’ (Gîtâ, p. 110), or perhaps the same thing as ‘of
steady mind’ at Gîtâ, p. 101. The sense is pretty much the same in both places.
3   Which has birth &c., Nîlakantha, i. e. all the creation, I presume.
4   The names, that is to say, of the various elements, and their qualities.
5   This must mean fortnights.
6   This is specified, says Arguna Misra, as the six months of the northern solstice are caused by the sun being at this Nakshatra.
     As to those six months, cf. Gîtâ, p. 81. For the same reason, Arguna Misra adds, the winter season is mentioned as the best.
7   The word âdi, literally beginning, is used in the whole of this passage in different senses; it means the source, it means the best,
     and it means the first in order.


 353     CHAPTER XXIX, 10.

the first among shining bodies 1; fire is said to be the first of the elements 2. Sâvitrî 3 of all branches of learning; Pragâpati of deities; the syllable Om of all the Vedas; and the Prâna life-wind, of all words 4; whatever is prescribed in this world, all that is called Sâvitrî 5. The Gâyatrî is the first among metres; among sacrificial animals, the goat 6 is mentioned as the first. Cows are the first among quadrupeds, and the twice-born among men 7. The Syena is first among birds; among sacrifices, the offering into the fire is the best; and among all reptiles, O best of the twice-born! the snake 8 is the highest. Of all ages the Krita is the first, there is no doubt of that. Among all precious things, gold is the first, and among vegetable products likewise the barley seed 9. Among all things to be eaten or swallowed food is the highest; and of
1   This should be compared with the enumeration at p. 345 supra, and that in the Gîtâ there referred to.
2   Cf. p. 346 supra. Nîlakantha takes fire to mean the gastric fire, and bhűta, rendered by us elements, to mean the species of beings
     born from eggs and wombs.
3  The famous verse ‘Tat savitur,’ &c. See inter alia Brihadâranyaka, p. 999; Âpastamba I, i, i, 9; Manu II, 77 seq., 104-.-170.
4  See pp. 264, 265 supra.
5  Here he turns back to the Sâvitrî,’ looking back in the manner of the lion,’ says Nîlakantha, and for purposes of upâsanâ. He does
    not give up the thread of his discourse entirely, but simply interjects this little clause. Nîlakantha adds, Sâvitrî here includes every
    mode of worship prescribed for Brâhmanas, &c.; and even for Mlekkhas. Cf. note 3, and Gautama (Bühler’s ed.), p. 174 note.
6   Cf. Khândogya, p. 109, and Sańkara’s commentary. Arguna Misra compares this text, Tasmâdesha eteshâm pasunâm
     sreshthatamogah. Where it occurs I know not.
7  Cf. Sânti Parvan (Râgadharma), chap. 11, St. ii.
8   I.e. Vâsuki, Nîlakantha. More probably it refers to the species. As it is used in various ceremonies.


354     ANUGÎTÂ.

all liquid substances which are to be drunk, water is the best. And among all immovable entities, without distinction, the Plaksha, the ever holy field of Brahman 1, is stated to be the first. I, too, am the first among all the patriarchs 2, there is no doubt of that. And the unthinkable, self-existent Vishnu is stated to be my own self. Of all mountains, the great Meru is stated to be the first-born. And among all quarters and sub-quarters, likewise, the eastern quarter 3 is the first. Likewise the Gańgâ going in three paths is stated to be the first-born among rivers. And likewise of all wells and reservoirs of water, the ocean is the first-born. And of all gods, Dânavas, Bhűtas, Pisâkas, snakes, and Rakshases, and of men, Kinnaras, and Yakshas, Îsvara 4 is the lord. The great Vishnu, who is full of the Brahman, and than whom there is no higher being in these three worlds, is the source of all the universe. Of all orders 5, that of householders is the first , there is no doubt of that. The unperceived is the source of the worlds; and the same is also the end of everything. Days end with the sun’s setting 6 the night ends with the sun’s rising; the end of pleasure is ever grief
1   I.e. the Creator; his field means, I presume, his special seat.
2   Beings from whom all creatures were born. See inter alia Sânti Parvan (Moksha Dharma), chap. 208, St. 5; Manu I, 34.
3   At p. 347 the north is mentioned. Arguna Misra has ‘ űrdhva,’ or upward here, and yet ‘north’ before. Is the north the best as the
      seat of the higher world mentioned at Sânti Parvan (Moksha Dharma), chap. 192, st. 8 seq.?
4   I. e. Rudra, says Nîlakantha.
5   Viz. Brahmakârin, householder, forester, and Samnyâsin. Cf. Sânti Parvan (Moksha), ch. 191, st. 10; Manu VI, 89; Gautama, p.190.
6   These stanzas also occur in the Sânti Parvan, chap. 27, St. 31 seq. (Râgadharma). Apart of them appears to be quoted in
     Sâńkhyasűtra V, 8o. And the commentator Vigńâna Bhikshu introduces it with the expression ‘iti srűyate.’ But it is not a Vedic text.


 355     CHAPTER XXX, I.

the end of grief ever pleasure. All accumulations end in exhaustion; all ascents end in falls; all associations end in dissociations; and life ends in death. All action ends in destruction; death is certain for whatever is born 1; everything movable or immovable in this world is ever transient. Sacrifice, gift, penance, study, observances, and regulations, all this ends in destruction 2 There is no end for knowledge. Therefore one whose self is tranquil, whose senses are subjugated, who is devoid of the idea that this or that is mine, who is devoid of egoism, is released from all sins by pure knowledge.


Brahman said:

The wheel of life 3 moves on; a wheel of which the spoke is the understanding, of which the pole 4 is the mind, of which the bonds are the group of the senses, of which the outer rim 5 is the five great elements, of which the environment is home 6; which
1   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 45.
2   All this is action, the fruit of which is perishable ; the fruit of knowledge, on the other hand, is everlasting.
3   Literally, time; it seems, however, to stand for the vicissitudes of worldly life. Cf. Svetâsvatara, p. 283. The body is called ‘wheel
     of time’ at p. 53 supra, but Arguna Misra there says ‘it is the wheel which causes the rotation of the wheel of time.’
4   The cause of its being large in dimensions, Arguna Misra; the supporting pillar, Nîlakantha. I prefer the former, and take the
      sense to be that worldly life is co-extensive with the operations or ‘fancies’ of the mind.
5   What is outside the elements, the physical manifestations of Prakriti, is beyond the domain of worldly life.
6   The possession of ‘home ‘ is equivalent to a dwelling in the midst of worldly life. Hence the idea of homelessness at inter alia Gîtâ, pp. 101—103.

356     ANUGÎTÂ.

abounds in old age and grief which moves in the midst of disease and misfortune, which rotates in 1 space and time; the noise of which is trouble and toil, the rotations 2 of which constitute day and night; which is encircled with cold and heat; of which pleasure and pain are the joints, and hunger and thirst the nails fixed into it, of which sunshine and shade are the ruts; which staggers in the opening or closing of an eyelid, which is enveloped in the fearful waters of delusion, which is ever revolving and void of consciousness 3 , which is measured by months and half months, is ever-changing 4, which moves through all the worlds 5 the mud 6 for which is penance and regulations, the mover of which is the force of the quality of passion 7; which is lit up 8 by the great egoism, which is sustained by the qualities; the fastenings in which are vexations 9;
1   This means, I presume, that worldly life is conditioned, so to say, by space and time.
2   I. e. the cause of the rotation, Nîlakantha.
3   I. e. unintelligent.
4   Now takes the form of a man, now of an animal, and then of some other thing, Nîlakantha. I think, however, that the meaning is,
      that it is not alike to all; different persons are in different states in this world.
5   Arguna Misra says this means that it is the cause of the movements in all the worlds. That is the sense I extract from his words,
      which are not quite clear, lokânâm samkarane hetus. The rendering in the text follows Nîlakantha.
6   I. e., I presume, that which retards the revolutions of the ‘wheel.’ Instead of’ penance,’ Nîlakantha’s reading is ‘the quality of
7   Cf. Sâńkhya-kârikâ, p. 13, and Vâkaspati’s commentary thereon.
8   ‘Animated,’ Nîlakantha. Egoism is the cause of the world, and of all knowledge of it. Cf. Sáńkhya-kârikâ, p. 24.
9   The text here is unsatisfactory. I follow Nîlakantha, who says ‘vexations = those arising from not obtaining what is desired.’


 357     CHAPTER XXX, 10.

which revolves in the midst of grief and destruction 1, which is full of actions and instruments of action 2, which is large, and which is extended by means of attachments 3, which is rendered unsteady by avarice and desire 4, which is produced by ignorance of various matters 5, which is attended upon by fear and delusion, and which is the cause of the delusion of all beings, which moves towards joy and pleasure 6, which has desire and wrath as its appurtenances, which is made up of the entities beginning with the Mahat and ending with the gross elements 7, which is unchecked, the imperishable source of all 8, the speed of which is like that of the mind, and which is never fatigued. This wheel of life, which is associated with the pairs of opposites, and which is devoid of consciousness, all the world, together with the immortals, should cast away, abridge, and check 9. That man, among all creatures, who always
1   Revolves in the midst of, = lives upon, is fed by, Nîlakantha.
2   I. e. the organs of action, I presume.
3   The more attachments one has, the more one is tied down to worldly life, and the more comprehensive such life becomes.
4   Avarice is coveting another’s wealth when one has one’s own; desire is the wish for that which one has not.
5   Nîlakantha reads ‘vikitra,’ which he renders to mean diversified, as being made up of the three qualities, ignorance there being
     the same thing as Prakriti, which is probably a better sense altogether than that obtainable from Arguna Misra’s reading.
6   Which moves by attachment to external pleasures, &c., Nîlakantha.
7   I.e. all the world developed from Prakriti—a common phrase.
8   This is Nîlakantha's forced meaning. But the text here is doubtful. Perhaps the sense is ‘in which production and dissolution are
      going on unchecked.’
9   See p. 344 note. For the last word, the variant here is sthâpayet, make steady or stop.

358     ANUGÎTÂ.

accurately understands the movement and stoppage 1 of the wheel of life is never deluded. That sage, released from all impressions 2, transcending all pairs of opposites, and released from all sins, attains the highest goal. The householder, and the Brahmakârin, the forester, and also the beggar 3, all these four orders are stated to have the order of householder for their basis. Whatever system of rules 4 is prescribed in this world, to follow it is good; this has been celebrated from ancient times 5. He who has been first refined by ceremonies 6, and who has duly observed vows, being born in a caste of high qualifications 7, and who understands the Vedas, should return 8 from his preceptor’s house. Always devoted to his own wife, behaving like 9 good men, with his senses restrained, and full of faith, one should perform the five sacrifices 10 in this world. The sage who eats what remains after offerings to deities 11 and guests, who is devoted to Vedic rites, who duly performs sacrifices and
1   I. e. the causes of the revolution and stoppage, Nîlakantha.
2   Impressions of previous actions, delusions, &c. And see p. 247 supra.
3   I. e. the Samnyâsin.
4   Sâstra. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 117.
5   ‘Such is the eternal fame,’ literally.
6   I. e. on whom the Vedic rites or Samskâras are duly performed. And see Gîtâ, p. 122.
7   I. e. one of the three higher castes.
8    The original is the technical word for the return of a Brahmakârin after finishing his studies. He is describing the’ householder.’
9    I. e. following the rule of conduct sanctioned by the good.
10  Vide Williams’ Dictionary, s.v. mahâyagńa ; Âsvalâyana Grihya III, 1, 3; Manu II, 69; IV, 21.
11  Cf. Gita, p. 62; a guest must always be fed, and unless he is satisfied the host must not eat. Cf. Sânti Parvan (Moksha), chap. 192,
       st. I5 Manu III, 106; Âpastamba II, 3, 7, 3.


 359     CHAPTER XXX, 24.

gifts according to his means, who is not thoughtlessly active 1 with the hand or foot, who is not thoughtlessly active with the eye. and who is not thoughtlessly active with his speech or any of his limbs, to such a one the word good applies. One should always have the sacred thread and a clean cloth, and be of pure vows, and self-restrained, and should always associate with good men, making gifts, and with one’s external organs restrained; one should restrain one’s lust and hunger 2, should be kind, should behave like the good, and keep a bamboo stick and a water-pot filled with water 3. One should learn and teach, should likewise perform sacrifices and officiate at others’ sacrifices, and should give and receive gifts,—thus one should adopt the sixfold mode of life 4. Know that three of these duties are the means of livelihood for Brâhmanas, the two teaching and officiating at sacrifices, and also receiving untainted gifts 5. And as to the other remaining three duties, gift, study, and sacrifice, they are pious 6 duties. With regard to those three duties, the sage who understands piety, who is self-restrained, kind, possessed of forgiveness, and equable to all creatures, should avoid heedlessness 7. The
1   The same word as at Gîtâ, p. 114, there rendered ‘vain activity.’
2   Cf. Âpastamba II, 1, 1, 2 seq.
3   Cf. Manu IV, 36; Âpastamba II, 1,1, 15.
4   These are the well-known six duties of Brâhmanas as specified by Manu and others. See the discussion of this point in the
5   Another reading is ‘gifts from an untainted (source).’
6   What is the exact meaning of this here? I suppose the meaning is that the performance of them is a pure performance of duty;
     the others are duties the performance of which supplies one’s own wants, and is therefore interested. Cf. Gautama X, 1 and 2.
I. e. omission or mistake in performance.

360     ANUGÎTÂ.

Brâhmana householder, who is of rigid vows, who is thus devoted, discharging all these duties as much as is in his power, conquers heaven.


Brahman said:

Thus 1 duly studying to the best of his power, in the way above 2 stated, and likewise living as a Brahmakârin, one who is devoted to his own duty and learned, who is a sage with all his senses restrained, who applies himself to what is agreeable and beneficial to the preceptor, who is pure 3, and constant in veracity and piety, should, with the permission of the preceptor, take food without decrying it 4, should eat the leavings of sacrificial offerings, and alms, and should stand, sit, and take exercise 5 duly, should sacrifice twice to the fire after becoming clean and with a concentrated mind, and should always bear a staff of the Bilva or Palâsa 6 wood. The clothing of the twice-born man should be of linen, or of cotton, or also a deerskin, or a cloth entirely dyed with reddish colour. There should also be a girdle of muńga; he should have matted hair, and likewise always carry water with him and have his sacred thread, be engaged in sacred
1   Arguna Misra says, ‘Having described first the order of householder, as that is the chief, he now describes that of Brahmakârin.’
     Cf. Apastamba II, , 9, 21, 1, and note.
2   Where? This is obscure.
3   Both internally and externally, I presume.
4   Cf. Taittirîya, p. 129; Sânti Parvan (Moksha), chap. 192, St. 6.
5   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 69. Arguna Misra says, ‘Having exercise by means of standing and sitting; the meaning is not sleeping except at the
     proper time.’
6  Cf. Manu II, 41 seq.


 361     CHAPTER XXXI, 14.

study, and free from avarice, and of rigid observances. Such a Brahmakârin, always making offerings likewise of pure water to satisfy the deities, being restrained in mind 1, is esteemed. One who is thus devoted 2, who is concentrated in mind, and continent 3, conquers heaven, and reaching the highest seat, does not return to birth. Refined by means of all ceremonies, and likewise living as a Brahmakârin 4, a sage who has renounced 5 all should go out of towns and dwell in forests 6 Wearing a skin or the bark of a tree, he should bathe every morning and evening, and always living within the forest, should not enter a town again. He should honour guests, and should also give them shelter at the proper time, living on fruits and leaves, and roots and Syâmâka grain. He should without sloth feed on water, air, and all forest-products down to grass as they come, in order 7, in accordance with the regulations 8 at his initiation. He should honour a guest who comes, by giving him water accompanied with roots, fruits, and leaves. And he should always without sloth give alms out of whatever he has for food. He should also eat always after the deities and guests
1    Or it may be, ‘being self-restrained and with all his heart.’ The constructions in the original vary greatly, and so they do in
the translation.
2    Applying himself to his duties.
3   Cf. Maitrî, p.18, and comment there.
4   Cf. Manu VI, 1 seq.
5   I. e. who is a mendicant ascetic.
6   Cf. p. 173 supra, note 9. Here he gives a description of the third order of forester, as to which compare generally Manu VI.
7   First the jungle-products, then air, &c., Arguna Misra. The sense seems to be that the restrictions should become gradually
      harder. Cf. ManuVI,24—31; Âpastamba II, 9,22,2 seq.; 11,9,23,2.
8   I.e. whatever restriction he put on himself when entering upon the particular mode of life.


362     ANUGÎTÂ.

are satisfied and with his speech restrained, having a mind free from envy 1, eating little, and depending on the deities. Restraining the external senses, kind, full of forgiveness, preserving his hair and moustache, performing sacrifices, addicted to sacred study, and devoted to veracity and piety, pure in body 2, always dexterous 3, always in forests, and concentrated in mind,—a forester whose senses are subdued and who is thus devoted 4 conquers the worlds.
     A householder, or a Brahmakârin, or again a forester, who wishes to apply himself to final emancipation should adopt the best line of conduct 5. Offering safety to all beings, the sage should become free from all action 6, and be agreeable to all beings, kind, and restrained in all his senses. He should make a fire 7 and feed on the alms obtained without asking 8 an without trouble 9, and which have come spontaneously 10, in a place free from smoke and where people have already 11 eaten. One who
1     I. e. of others for obtaining more, and so forth. Arguna Misra’s reading is different, and he renders it to mean, ‘one by whom
       the rule of life as a Brahmakârin has not been violated.’
2    Arguna Misra’s reading, ‘one who has cast away all attachment to the body.’ Compare as to hair and moustache, Manu VI, 6 seq.
3     See Gîtâ, p. 127. Here the meaning is probably assiduous in the performance of duties, vows, and so forth.
4     I. e. applies himself to his duties.
5     Arguna Misra says this means ânandâsramam, but there must be some bad copying here. I take the word as it stands to mean
        something like the ‘godlike endowments’ at Gîtâ, p. 114.
6      See Gîtâ, pp. 54, 127. The meaning here is probably that of action without egoism. See Gîtâ, p. 55.
I. e. Arguna Misra says, ‘not at night.’ The readings are unsatisfactory. I read kritvâ vahnim, but diffidently. Is the allusion to
        the rule at Âpastamba II, , 21, io? Cf. Gautama III, 27.
8      Cf. Kaushîtaki, p. 32.
9      I. e. to the giver. Cf. Gîtâ, p. I 20.
10    See Gîtâ, p. 10.
11    Cf. Manu VI, 56; Gautama III, 15.


 363     CHAPTER XXXI, 26.

understands final emancipation should seek to obtain alms after the cleaning 1 of the vessels used for cooking, and should not rejoice if he obtains, and should not be dejected if he does not obtain alms. Nor should he beg for too much alms 2, seeking merely to sustain life. Eating only a little, he should go about for alms with a concentrated mind, looking out for the proper time. He should not wish for earnings in common with another, nor should he eat when honoured; for an ascetic should be averse from all earnings accompanied with honour 3. When eating, he should not taste any articles of food which have been eaten by others 4, or which are pungent, astringent, or bitter, and likewise no sweet juices. He should eat just enough for his livelihood—for the support of life. One who understands final emancipation should seek for a livelihood without obstructing other creatures; and when he goes about for alms, he should not go following after another 5. He should not parade his piety, he should move about in a secluded place, free from passion. He should resort for shelter to an empty house, or a forest, or the foot of a tree, or a river likewise, or the cavern of a mountain. In summer, he should pass but a single night 6 in a town; and in the rains, he may dwell in one place. He should move about the
1    I.e., I presume, in order to avoid interfering with others’ comforts. And see last note.
2    See Manu VI,55.  As to proper time further on, see last note.
3   Cf. Sanatsugâtîya, pp. 145—117; ‘without respect’ at Gîtâ, p. 120, means probably with disrespect, otherwise that passage and
     this would be somewhat inconsistent. See too Manu II, 162.
4   Cf. Manu II, 56; Gîtâ, p.118; and p. 269 supra.
5   As that other may get nothing if they go together, Arguna Misra. Cf. Manu VI, 51.
6   Cf. Gautama III, 21.


364     ANUGÎTÂ.

world like a worm 1, his path being pointed out by the sun, and he should walk with circumspection over the earth out of compassion to all beings 2. He should not make any accumulations; and should eschew dwelling with friends 3. And the man who understands final emancipation should verily do all acts which he has to do, always with clean water. A man should always bathe in clean water. And with his senses restrained, he should devote himself to these eight observances 4,—harmlessness, life as a Brahmakârin, veracity, and also straightforwardness, freedom from anger, freedom from the habit of carping, restraint of the external organs, and habitual freedom from the habit of backbiting. He should always practise a sinless mode of conduct, not deceptive and not crooked; and free from attachment should always make one who comes as a guest take a morsel of food. He should eat just enough for livelihood—for the support of life. And he should eat only what has been obtained with piety 5, and should not follow his own mere desire 6. He should not accept anything at all other than food and clothing. And he should accept as much as he eats and no more. He should not receive from others, nor should he ever give to others 7.
1    I. e. not very fast, Arguna Misra; ‘the path being pointed out by the sun ‘= not at night, for fear of destroying worms, &c.
2    This seems to be very like the practice of the Gainas of the present day. And cf. Manu VI, 69.
3   Cf. Gîtâ, pp. 68—103.
4   Cf. Gîtâ, p. ‘‘4, and cf. also Sanatsugâtîya, p. 153.
5   That is to say, obtained without violation of any binding obligation, or rule of the Sâstras.
6   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 117.
7   This is not very clear, and Arguna Misra’s comments are not intelligible. The sense seems to be this, ‘He should not take more
     than is wanted, nor should he keep any accumulations from which to give to others, but should at once share with others all
     that is earned.’


365     CHAPTER XXXI, 39.

But owing to the helplessness of people, a wise man should always share with others. He should not appropriate another’s riches,
and should not take anything unasked. Nor, verily, after enjoying any object should one become afterwards attached to it. One who has anything to do 1 should take earth, water, pebbles likewise, and leaves, flowers, and fruits which are not secured 2 by anybody, as they come 3. One should not live by the occupation of an artisan 4, nor should one wish for gold. One should not hate, should not teach 5, and should be void of all belongings 6. One should eat what is consecrated by faith 7, and should avoid all controversies, should act without a purpose 8 should be free from attachment, and without fixed appointments with people 9. One should not perform, or cause to be performed, any action involving expectation of fruit, or involving any destruction of life, or the assemblage of people 10 Rejecting all things,
1    Arguna Misra says that this means if he wants them for any particular purpose he should take the earth, &c.
2    I. e. apparently, taken possession of and preserved as one’s own by anybody.
3    Arguna Mirra renders this by ‘ which lead to action.’ Is it not rather the ‘spontaneous earnings’ at Gîtâ, p. 60?
4    Cf. Manu III, 64; Âpastamba I, 6, 18, 18; Gautama XVII, 7.
5    I. e. teach one who does not ask to be instructed. Cf. Manu II, 110.
6    Cf. Gîtâ, p. 60; the original word, however, is not the same.
7    See p. 360, note 3 supra; Manu II, 54—55; Gautama IX, 59. ‘Controversies;’ the original is nimitta, and the interpretation is
      what appears to be Arguna Misra’s. It may also mean ‘omens.’ That this is the true sense appears from Manu VI, 50.
8    Cf. Gîtâ, p. 48.
9    Arguna Misra says, ‘e. g. I shall come to you to-morrow for alms,’ &c. Cf. Âpastamba I, 6, 19, 12.
10  The words are the same as at Gîtâ, p. 54, ‘ keeping people (to their duties),’ but the sense seems to be different. The
       commentators say nothing on this.


366     ANUGÎTÂ.

and being equable to all beings, moving and unmoving, one should become an ascetic with small belongings. One should not perturb any other person 1, nor should one be perturbed by any other person’ . He who is trusted by all beings is said to be the foremost among those who understand final emancipation. One should not think of what is not come 2, nor reflect on that which is past; one should disregard the present, being concentrated (in mind and indifferent to time 3. He should not defile 4 anything by the eye, or the mind, or by speech, nor should he do anything wrong openly or in secret. One who draws in the senses from all sides as a tortoise draws in his limbs , and in whom the senses, mind, and understanding are absorbed , who is free from desires, who understands all truth, who is free from the pairs of opposites, and from the ceremony of svâhâ, and who is free from salutations , and who is free from the thought that this or that is mine, who is free from egoism, who is free from anxiety for new acquisitions or protection of old acquisitions, and self-controlled , who is free from
1   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 101.
2    I.e. one should not look to the future with any aspirations or expectations, and should not look back on the past with grief,
      Arguna Misra. See too p. 170, note 9 supra.
3   I am not sure if this is a correct interpretation. But it does not seem likely that the other possible sense—literally
     ‘expecting time ‘—can be intended here.
4    This is obscure. Is the sense this, that one should not observe, or think, or speak badly or of the bad side of things?

367     CHAPTER XXXI, 51.

expectations, who is free from attachments to any entity, and who is dependent on none 1, who is attached to the self, and who understands the truth, is emancipated, there is no doubt of that. Those who perceive the self, which is without hands, foot, or back, without a head, without a stomach, which is free from the operations of the qualities 2 absolute, untainted, and stable, devoid of smell, devoid of taste or touch, devoid of colour, and also devoid of sound, which is to be understood 3, which is unattached, and which is also devoid of flesh, which is free from anxiety 4, imperishable, divine, and though dwelling in a house 5, always dwelling in all entities, they never die 6. There the understanding reaches not, nor the senses, nor the deities, nor Vedas, sacrifices, nor worlds 7,
nor penance, nor valour 8; the attainment to it of those who are possessed of knowledge is stated to be without comprehension of symbols 9. Therefore the learned man who knows the property of being void of symbols 10, being devoted to pious conduct, and
1    Cf. Gîtâ, p. 6o.
2    These are effects of Prakriti by which the Purusha is unaffected.
3    Literally, ‘pursued.’
4    This is obscure. Arguna Misra’s text is niskityam. Does that mean ‘which should be accurately understood?’ The rendering in
      the text of Nîlakantha’s reading may mean that the Brahman has no such thoughts (kintâ) as are referred to at Gîtâ, p. 115.
5    Does this mean the body?
6    I. e. are free from birth and death. Cf. Âpastamba I, 8, 22, 4.
7    This, again, is not quite clear. Probably the explanation is to be found in the passage at Gîtâ, p. 79.
8    Nîlakantha’s reading is ‘obseryances or vows.’
9    I.e.’ not to be acquired by inference,’ ArgunaMisra, p.351 supra.
10  See p. 309 supra; who is without symbols, and knows piety, according to Arguna Misra’s reading.


368     ANUGÎTÂ.

resorting to concealed 1 piety should adopt the mode of life necessary for experience 2. Though undeluded, he should act in the manner of the deluded 3, not finding fault with piety 4. He should perform piety, behaving so that others would always disrespect him 5, and should not find fault with the ways of the good 6. That sage is said to be the best who has adopted this line of conduct. The senses, and the objects of the senses, and the five great elements, and mind, understanding, egoism, the unperceived, and the Purusha likewise 7, by an accurate determination about the truth, after understanding all these, one attains heaven 8, being released from all bonds. One who knows the truth, understanding these same entities at the time of the termination of his life , should meditate, exclusively pondering on one point 9; and then, depending on none 10, he gets emancipation. Freed from all attachments, like the atmosphere dwelling in space 11, with his accumulations 12 exhausted, and free from distress 13 he attains to the highest seat.
1    See p. 159 supra, note 7, and cf. Manu III, 109, which is the text referred to in note 5 there.
2    I.e. direct perception of the Brahman. See Gîtâ, p. 57, note 5.
3    See p. 160 supra, note 8, and cf. also Manu II, 110.
4    Arguna Misra compares Gîtâ, p. 55, about ‘shaking convictions.’
5    Cf. pp. 159—161 supra.
6    This means, I presume, the good devoted to action and not to knowledge only.
7    These are the famous elements of the Sâńkhya; see Sűtra I, 61.
8    Cf. p. 159 and note 2.
9    Cf. p. 300 supra.
10  Cf. Gîtâ, p. 60.
11 Cf. Gîtâ, p. 82, note 3.
12  Of actions previously performed. See p. 246 supra.
13  Cf. Gîtâ, p. 101, where, however, the original word is different.


 369     CHAPTER XXXII, 6.


Brahman said:

The ancients who perceived the established truth call renunciation 1 penance; and the Brâhmanas dwelling in the seat of the Brahman 2 understand knowledge to be concerned with the Brahman 3. The highest Brahman is very far off 3, and the attainment of it depends on Vedic knowledge 4; it is free from the pairs of opposites, devoid of qualities, everlasting, of unthinkable qualities 5, and supreme. The men of talent, who are pure 6, and whose minds are refined, transcending passion, and being untainted, perceive that supreme principle by means of knowledge and penance. Those who are constantly devoted to renunciation7, and understand the Brahman and wish for the supreme, go to the happy path by penance. Penance 8 is said to be a light; correct conduct is the means to piety; knowledge verily should be understood to be the highest, and renunciation the best penance. He who understands determinately the self which is unperturbed, which abides in all entities, and which is the essential
1   Abandoning of fruit, Arguna Misra. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 121.
2   Cf. p. 339 supra, note 4, dwelling in = adhering to.
3   See Gîtâ, p. 104.
4   Cf. Sanatsugâtîya, p. 158 seq.
5   Viz, the three famous ones.
6   Pure, refined, and untainted are not easily distinguished. Probably ‘pure’ refers to external cleanliness; ‘untainted’ to freedom
     from sin and such taints; and ‘refined’ to freedom from error.
7   I. e. who have no ‘belongings,’ Arguna Misra.
8   Action without desire, Arguna Misra, who adds that it is called a light, as it leads to knowledge.


370     ANUGÎTÂ.

element in knowledge, he is laid down 1 as being able to move everywhere. The learned man who perceives, association and dissociation, and likewise unity and diversity 2, is released from misery. He who desires nothing, and despises nothing 3, becomes eligible, even dwelling in this world, for assimilation with the Brahman 4. He who knows the truth about the qualities of Pradhâna 5, and understands the Pradhâna of all entities 6, who is free from the thought that this or that is mine, and free from egoism 7, is emancipated, there is no doubt of that. One who is free from the pairs of opposites, free from the ceremonies of salutation, free from the ceremony of svadhâ 8, attains to that everlasting principle which is free from the pairs of opposites, and devoid of qualities, by tranquillity only. Abandoning all action, whether agreeable or disagreeable, developed from the qualities 9, and abandoning both truth and falsehood 10, a creature is emancipated, there is no doubt of that. The great tree of Brahman 11 is
1   ‘Laid down ‘ is literally ‘wished.’
2    I.e. presume this means the real fact underlying the appearances of association and so forth, namely, that there is but one reality,
       and all appearances of difference &c. are unreal. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 124.
3     Cf. Gîtâ, p. 65, and see Katha, p. 155.
4     Cf. Gîtâ, p. 65.
5     The qualities, viz, the three, of Pradhâna, I. e. constituting Prakriti, or nature.
6      See Gîtâ, p. 106, and note 3 there.
7     For this whole expression, which occurs so frequently, cf. Maitrî, p. 44, and comment there.
8     See p. 324 supra, note 8.
9     Cf. Gîtâ, p. 48; Svetâsvatara, p.360.
10   I. e., I presume, what is real and unreal in a worldly view,—the great truth is not to be ‘abandoned.’ Cf. Taittirîya, pp. 97—99;
         p. 191 supra; Sânti Parvan (Moksha), chap. 174, St. 53; Âpastamba II, 9, 21, 13.
11   I. e., says Arguna Misra, the tree of worldly life produced from the Brahman. Compare chapter XII supra.


 371     CHAPTER XXXII, 17.

eternal; a tree which is produced from the unperceived as the seed, which consists of the understanding as its trunk, whose collection of boughs is the great egoism, the sprouts within which are the senses, the great branches of which are the great elements, and the side branches the objects of sense, which is always possessed of leaves, always possessed of flowers, in which agreeable and disagreeable fruits are always produced, and which is fed upon by all creatures. Cutting and piercing this tree 1 with the sword of knowledge of the truth, and abandoning the bonds in the shape of attachment, which cause birth, death, and old age 2, a wise man who is free from the thought that this or that is mine, and who is devoid of egoism, is emancipated, there is no doubt of that. There are these two birds 3, which are unchanging, and which should also be known to be unintelligent 4. But as to that other who is above them, he is called intelligent. When the inner self, devoid of knowledge of nature 5, and as it were non-intelligent 6, understands that which is
1   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 111; and Mundaka, p. 307, and commentary there.
2   So I render the original, though the sense at first sight appears to be ‘which are caused by birth,’ &c.
3   Viz. the understanding and egoism, which dwell in the ‘tree,’ Arguna Misra. Nîlakantha says, ‘the great and the individual self.’
4   Cf. Sâńkhya-kârikâ 11, and comment of Vâkaspati Misra. The self is not unintelligent ; and as the birds are so described, they
     must stand for some manifestation of Prakriti, which understanding and egoism are. Otherwise ‘bird’ does stand for ‘self.’ See p. 189 supra.
5   The original word here is sattva, on which see p. 351 supra. Arguna Misra renders it here by Prakriti.
6   So Nîlakantha; ‘the only intelligent principle,’—Arguna Misra. On Nîlakantha’s interpretation ‘inner self’ must be the same
     thing as Bhűtâtman at Maitrî, p. 41.


372     ANUGÎTÂ.

beyond nature, then understanding the Kshetra 1, and with an understanding comprehending all, and transcending the qualities 2 he is released from all sins.


Brahman said:

Some think of the Brahman as a tree; some think of the Brahman as a great forest; and some think of the Brahman as unperceived; and some as transcendent and without misery 3; and they 4 think all this to be produced from and absorbed into the unperceived. He who even for the space of a single exhalation, at the time of the termination of life 5 becomes equable 6, attaining to the self, becomes fit for immortality. Restraining the self in the self 7, even for the space of a wink, he repairs to the inexhaustible acquisition 8 of those who have knowledge, through the tranquillity of the self 9. And restraining the life-winds again and
1    See p. 351 supra.
2    See Gîtâ, p. 109.
3   As to the first two clauses comp. pp. 284—371 supra; the last two are said by Arguna Misra to represent the Sâńkhya and Yoga
      doctrines respectively.
4   I presume this means all teachers. But Nîlakantha takes it to mean the Sâńkhya, and he takes the preceding words as indicating
     two views based on Sruti texts, viz, the first, that the world is a development of the Brahman, and the other that the Brahman does
     not undergo any development or change. Anâmaya he takes to mean changeless, and Brahmamaya he takes to mean developed
     from the Brahman.
5   Cf. Gîtâ, pp. 77, 78.
6   One who sees the supreme as the only real entity, Arguna Misra. Nîlakantha takes it to mean one who identifies himself with
     everything. See Gîtâ, p. 65, and note 4 there.
7   See p. 344
8   I. e. the goal to be acquired.
9   ‘Tranquillity ‘—the original may also be rendered by ‘favour,’ as to which cf. p. 234 supra, but further on the phrase ‘having a tranquil self’
       occurs, where the latter sense is not quite suitable. See Gîtâ, p. 51, and Yoga-sűtra I, 33.

 373     CHAPTER XXXIII, 7.

again by control of the life-winds 1, of ten or twelve 2 modes , he repairs to that which is beyond the twenty-four 3. Thus having first a tranquil self, he obtains whatever he desires. When the quality of goodness predominates in the unperceived 4, that fits one for immortality. The men of knowledge extol nothing else beyond goodness. By inference 5 we understand the attainment of the being to depend on goodness. It is not possible otherwise 6 to attain that being, O best of the twice-born! Forgiveness, courage, harmlessness, equability, truth, straightforwardness, knowledge, abandonment 7, and also renunciation are laid down as constituting con-
1   I. e. the specific modes which are mentioned of control of life- winds, e.g. at Gîtâ, p. 61, or Yoga-sűtra II, 49 seq.
2   Nîlakantha proposes two interpretations of this. He says the ten are the eight mentioned in Yoga-Sűtra II, 29, and in addition
      tarka and vairâgya (as to which see Yoga-Sűtra I, 5 and 17). To make up the twelve he substitutes for the last two the four named
      at Yoga-sűtra I, 33. He also suggests that ‘ten or twelve’ may mean twenty-two, which he makes up thus. The five modes of
      yama (Yoga-sűra II, 30), five of niyâma (ibid. 32), the remaining six in Yoga-sűtra II, 29, the four in Yoga-sűtra I, 33 and tarka
      and vairâgya as before.
3   The twenty-four are the elements according to the Sâńkhya system. See Sâńkhya-sâra, p. 11, and p. 368 supra. That which is
      beyond them is Purusha.
4   The unperceived, it should be noted, is made up of the three qualities; the predominance of goodness indicates enlightenment, or knowledge.
5   The middle term in the inference being, says Arguna Misra, the enlightening effect of the quality in question.
6   cf p. 167
7   The original is tyâga, which Arguna Misra renders by ‘abandonment of all belongings;’ renunciation, scil. of fruit.


374     ANUGÎTÂ.

duct of the quality of goodness. By this very inference the wise verily believe in the Being and nature as one, there is no doubt of that. Some learned men, who are devoted to knowledge, assert the unity of the Kshetragńa and nature 1. But that is not correct. That they are always distinct from one another is also said without due consideration 2 Distinction and also association 3 should be accurately understood. Unity and diversity4 are likewise laid down. Such is the doctrine of the learned. Between the gnat and the udumbara 5 there is observed unity and diversity also. As a fish is in water distinct from it , such is their relation ; such is the relation of the drops of water with the leaf of the lotus.

The preceptor said:

Then those Brâhmanas, who were the best of sages, having again felt doubts, interrogated the grandsire of the people who spoke to them thus.
1   Here, says Nîlakantha, the author indicates an objection to the proposition stated just before. But the passage is not clear.
2   This, says Nîlakantha, is a reply to the Sâńkhyas, who hold the two to be distinct. Nîlakantha adds, that if the two are distinct,
     nature will, conceivably, adhere even to an emancipated creature; and if they are one, then the being or self would be really
     engaging in action and so forth, and that activity being really a property of the self, could not be destroyed save by the
     destruction of the self. Hence that view is also wrong.
3   Like that of sea and wave, Nîlakantha.
4   Unity of Brahman and diversity of manifestation of nature, Arguna Misra, who adds—by reason of the association they are
     spoken of as one, by reason of the unity and diversity they are distinct. The next sentence contains three parallel cases.
5   Cf. as to all this, Sânti Parvan, chap. 194, st. 38 seq. (Moksha Dharma); chap. 249, st. 20 seq.; chap. 285, st. 33 seq.

 375     CHAPTER XXXIV, 7.


The sages said:

Which form of piety is deemed to be the most worthy of being performed? We observe the various modes of piety to be as it were contradictory. Some say it 1 remains after the body is destroyed ; some say that is not so. Some say everything 2 is doubtful; and others that there is no doubt. Some say the permanent principle is impermanent, and others, too, that it exists, and others that it exists not 3. Some say it is of one form or twofold, and others that it is mixed 4. Some Brâhmanas, too, who know the Brahman and perceive the truth, believe it to be one; others distinct; and others again that it is manifold 5. Some say both time and space exist 6, and others that that is not so. Some have matted hair and skins; and some are clean-shaven and without covering. Some people are for bathing; some for the omission 7 of bathing. Some are for taking food; others are intent on fasting. Some people extol action, and
1   I.e. the piety, Arguna Misra; the self Nîlakantha.
2   I.e. such as piety, &c., Arguna Misra.
3   I follow Arguna Misra, who says ‘permanent’ means soul, &c. The correct expression would seem to be ‘that which is called
     permanent by others is impermanent.’
4   This is the view of those who hold the theory of Parinâma, or development, says Arguna Misra.
5   ‘To be one ‘= knowledge to be all of one description, ‘distinct ‘=knowledge having various entities for its distinct objects (this is the
      view of the holders of the Vignânavâda, says Arguna Misra); manjfold= that the selfs are numberless. The words here are nearly
      identical with those at Gîtâ, p. 83, see note 4 there.
6   I.e. help in action, Arguna Misra.
7   See Âpastamba I, 1,1, 2 (comment).


376     ANUGÎTÂ.

others tranquillity. Some extol final emancipation; some various kinds of enjoyments; some wish for riches, and others indigence. Some say means 1 should be resorted to; others that that is not so. Some are devoted to harmlessness, and some given up to destruction; some are for merit and glory; and others say that is not so. Some are devoted to goodness; some are in the midst of doubts; some are for pleasure, and some for pain 2 Some people say meditation 3, other Brâhmanas say sacrifice, and others, gifts; but others extol penance, and other persons sacred study; some knowledge, and renunciation 4; and those who ponder on the elements 5, nature 6 Some extol everything, and others nothing 7.
1   I. e. for the acquisition of anything desirable, Arguna Misra, who adds, ‘by those who wish for piety.’ Nîlakantha says means
     ‘meditation and so forth;’ as to ‘that is not so’ he cites what he calls a Sruti, which is however one of the Kârikâs of Gaudapâda
      on the Műndukya; see p. 432.
2   This, too, is not quite clear, but Nîlakantha says, ‘meditation should be practised for release from pain, and for acquisition of
     pleasure;’ ‘and others say not so, it should be done without desire.’
3   That is to say, they hold that meditation should be practised.
4   Arguna Misra seems to take this to mean ‘renunciation of knowledge,’ i. e. a blank, and says this was the view of the
     Mâdhyamikas,—I suppose the Mâdhyamika Bauddhas.
5   I. e. the Kârvâkas, Arguna Misra.
6   Svetâsvatara, p. 276, and Sańkara’s commentary there.
7   Were there optimists and pessimists at the time of the Anugîtâ in India? This verse, however, does not occur in some MSS.
     Nîlakantha’s note on this passage may be of some interest. He says, ‘Some hold that the self exists after the body is lost; others,
     that is the Lokâyatas or Kârvâkas, hold the contrary. Everything doubtful is the view of the Syâdvâdins; nothing doubtful that
     of the Tairthikas, the great teachers (I presume, about their own respective doctrines). Everything impermanent, Târkikas;
     permanent, Mîmâmsakas; nothing exists, the Sűnyavâdins; something exists, but only momentarily,
Saugatas; knowledge is one,
     but the ego and non-ego are two different principles, the Yogâkâras; mixed, Udulomas; one, is the view of the worshippers of the
     Brahman as possessed of qualities; distinct, other Mîmâmsakas, who hold that the special actions are the cause (of everything, is
     meant, I presume); manifold = the atomists; time and space = astrologers. Those who “say that is not so,” that is to say, that what
     we see has no real existence at all, are the Vriddhas, ancient philosophers; omission to bathe = the condition of Naishthika Brahmakârins;
     bathing — householder’s condition; “means should be resorted to, that is not so,” those who are against all meditation, &c., according to
     the Sruti text, which Nîlakantha quotes; “merit and glory, that is not so,” some say there is no merit as the Lokâyatas or Kârvâkas;
    “knowledge, renunciation,” the former is to be gained only by means of the latter; “ponder on elements” = who are intent on the investigation
     of the  true nature of things; nature = abundance of resources, by which alone knowledge is produced, not by mere renunciation.’ It will be
     understood, that this commentary assumes a different syntactical construction of the original in some places from that adopted in our translation.


 377     CHAPTER XXXIV, 17.

And, O best of the gods! piety being thus confused and abounding in contradictions, we are deluded, and come to no determination. People are acting, saying this is good, this is good. And he who is attached to a certain form of piety, always esteems that. Here therefore our understanding breaks down, and our mind is distracted. We wish, O best of beings ! to be informed of what is good. Be pleased now to proceed to state what is so mysterious, and what is the cause of the connexion between the Kshetragńa and nature. Thus addressed by those Brâhmanas, the venerable, holy, and talented creator of worlds told them accurately what they asked.




Brahman said:

Well then, I will declare to you what you ask of me, O best of men . Learn what a preceptor told a pupil who went to him. Hearing it all, deliberate on it properly. Non-destruction of all creatures, that is deemed to be the greatest duty 1. This is the highest seat 2, free from vexation and holy in character. The ancients who perceived the established truth call knowledge the highest happiness. Therefore by pure knowledge one is released from all sins. And those who are constantly engaged in destruction, and who are infidels 3 in their conduct, and who entertain avarice and delusion, go verily to hell. Those who without sloth perform actions with expectations, rejoice in this world, being born again and again. But those wise and talented men, who perform actions with faith, free from any connexion with expectations, perceive correctly 4. Now I will proceed to state how the association and dissociation of Kshetragńa and nature take place. Learn that, O best of men ! The relation here is said to be that between the object and subject 5. The subject
1   See p. 291 supra, and note 3 there.
2   So literally; the sense is—that which one is to aim at.
3   The original is nâstika, the contrary of that ‘ âstikya,’ which at Gîtâ, p. 126, we have rendered by ‘belief (in a future world),’
     following Srîdhara. Râmânuga, whose commentary came to hand too late for any other than a very occasional use in the
    translation of the Gîtâ, renders it by ‘belief in the truth of the teaching of the Vedas.’
4   I. e. learn the truth.
5   I use the terms subject and object here in the philosophical sense explained by Sir W. Hamilton, viz, the thinking agent and the
      object of thought respectively. And cf. also the passage referred to in note 3 on p. 379


 379   CHAPTER XXXV, 15.

is always the being, and nature is stated to be the object. It has been explained in the above mode, as having the relation of the gnat and the udumbara 1. Nature which is non-intelligent knows nothing, though it is the object of enjoyment 2. Who enjoys and what is enjoyed 3 is learnt from the Sâstras. Nature is said always to abound in the pairs of opposites, and to be constituted of the qualities; the Kshetragńa is free from the pairs of opposites, devoid of parts, and in essence free from the qualities. He abides in everything alike 4 and is connected with all knowledge 5; and he always enjoys nature as a lotus-leaf enjoys water. Even brought into contact with all qualities, a learned man remains untainted 6 There is no doubt that the being is unattached just like the unsteady drop of water placed upon a lotus-leaf 7. It is established that nature is the property 8 of the being. And the relation of the two is like that of matter and the maker 9. As one goes into a dark place taking a light with him , so those who wish for the supreme go with the light of nature 10. While there is oil
1   P. 374 supra. The relation is one of close connexion, coupled with some identity of nature (because, says Nîlakantha, an entirely
     extraneous thing could not get into the inside of the fruit, and the gnat’s body therefore must have come from the fruit itself), but
     still the elements are distinct.
2    See p. 371 supra, note 4.
3   Cf. Maitrî, p. 108.
4   Cf. Gîtâ, pp. 105, io6.
5   Knowledge of the Kshetragńa forms part of all real knowledge. Arguna Misra’s reading and interpretation are different. He says,
     ‘As he is seen coming to light everywhere alike, so,’ &c.
6    Cf. Gîtâ, pp. 55—110.
7   Again the common simile.
8   The original is dravya, rendered ‘matter’ in the next sentence. Arguna Misra paraphrases it by ‘upakarana,’ paraphernalia.
9   So the original, the sense is not clear. But see Svetâsvatara, p.368.
10 Knowledge, which, says Nîlakantha, is a manifestation of nature. Arguna Misra says the knowledge of the truth which the self
     acquires is by means of nature. Cf. Sańkhya-kârikâ 56, and comment.


380     ANUGÎTÂ.

and wick 1, the light shines; but the flame is extinguished when the oil and wick are exhausted. Thus nature is perceived 2; the being is laid down as being unperceived. Understand this, O Brâhmanas! Well now, I will tell you something more. One who has a bad understanding does not acquire knowledge even with a thousand admonitions. And one who is possessed of knowledge enhances his happiness even with a fourth share 3. Thus should one understand the accomplishment of piety by apt means. For the talented man who knows these means, attains supreme happiness 4. As a man travelling along some way without provisions for the journey, travels with great discomfort, and may even be destroyed on the way, so should one understand, that by action 5 the fruit is or is not produced. For a man to see within his self 6 what is agreeable and what is disagreeable to him is good. And as one who is devoid of a perception of the truth rashly travels on foot by a long way unseen before 7, while another goes by the same
1   So Nîlakantha. Arguna Misra does not take guna here to mean ‘wick.’
2   I.e., I presume, in its manifestations; it is perceived for some time and then vanishes. Cf. Sâńkhya-kârikâ 59—61; the Purusha
      is not ‘perceived’ in this sense.
3   Viz, of admonition, Arguna Misra.
4   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 70, where the same phrase occurs.
5   The fruit of this is uncertain; knowledge which is in one’s self is the thing to be worked for.
6   I.e. the mind, Nîlakantha. The meaning is, he should not care for external pleasure and pain. Cf. Gîtâ, inter alia, p.50.
7   This seems to be so left imperfect in the original. The construction seems to be this: the progress of the latter is as great as that
     of one who drives in a chariot as compared with that of one who goes on foot with much suffering. Cf. the construction on
     next page.


 381     CHAPTER XXXV, 28.

way in a carriage 1 drawn by horses, and going swiftly, such is the progress of the men of understanding. Having climbed up a mountain one should not look at the surface of the earth 2 One sees a man travelling in a chariot, and void of intelligence, afflicted by reason of the chariot. As far as there is a carriage-path, he goes in the carriage; where the carriage-path stops, a learned man goes on abandoning the carriage. So travels the talented man, who understands the procedure respecting knowledge of the truth and devotion 3, and who knows about the qualities, comprehending the gradation 4 one above the other. As one who without a boat dives into the ocean with his arms only, through delusion, undoubtedly wishes for destruction; while a wise man likewise knowing distinctions 5, and having a boat with good oars, goes in the water without fatigue, and soon crosses the reservoir, and having crossed it goes to the other shore, throwing
1   I.e. the Sâstras, says Nîlakantha. Cf. Gîtâ, p. 117.
2   When one has arrived at knowledge,—the highest seat, says Nîlakantha,—one need not perform the dictates of the Sâstras,
     which are only preliminary to the acquisition of knowledge. Cf. Gîtâ pp. 48, 73. Cf. as to this figure of the chariot and the next
     one about the boat, Brihadâranyaka, p. 695.
3   I adopt Arguna’s rendering of the original here, viz. Yoga. The meaning, on that rendering, is the same as it is in the Gîtâ.
4   According to Arguna Misra, action with desire, action without desire, and lastly, knowledge. According to Nîlakantha, action
     aid down in the Sâstras, then Yoga, and then the condition of Hamsa, Paramahamsa, &c.
5   Literally, one knowing divisions. I presume the meaning is distinctions between various things as to which Suits which, and so
     forth. The boat, says Nîlakantha, is a preceptor, and even a preceptor is not to be sought for after a man has achieved Yoga;
     hence the text proceeds to speak further on of casting aside the boat. Wishes for destruction = is sure to meet destruction.


382     ANUGÎTÂ.

aside the boat, and devoid of the thought that this or that is mine. This has been already explained by the parallel of the carriage and pedestrian. One who has come by delusion through affection, adheres to that like a fisherman to his boat, being overcome by the thought that this or that is mine. It is not possible to move on land after embarking in a boat. And likewise one cannot move in water after entering a carriage. Thus there are various actions in regard to different objects 1. And as action is performed in this world, so does it result to them 2. That which sages by their understanding meditate upon, which is void of any smell whatever, void of taste, and void of colour, touch, or sound, that is called the Pradhâna 3. Now that Pradhâna is unperceived; a development of the unperceived is the Mahat; and a development of the Pradhâna when it is become Mahat is egoism. From egoism is produced the development, namely, the great elements; and of the elements respectively, objects of sense are verily stated to be the development 4. The unperceived is of the nature of seed 5, and also productive in its essence. And we have heard
1  I.e. appertaining to the various orders of householders, &c., Nîlakantha. But I am not aware of any authority for this sense of vishaya.
2   I.e. those who perform them.
3    Nîlakantha says, ‘Having stated above the means of knowledge, he now states the proper object of knowledge.’
4   See p. 332 supra. The original for development is guna, literally quality.
5   The meaning of this passage seems to be identical with that of Sâńkhya-kârikâ 3. Productive (Prasavâtmakam) is probably to
     be explained as Prasavadharmi is at Sâńkhya-kârikâ 11 (see commentary of Vâkaspati, pp.59 , 60), viz, always undergoing
     development. The great elements are of course the tanmâtras.


 383    CHAPTER XXXV, 42.

that the great self is of the nature of seed and a product. Egoism is of the nature of seed and a product also again and again. And the live great elements are verily of the nature of seed and products. The objects of the five elements are of the nature of seed 1, but they do not yield products. Learn about their properties. Now space has one quality, air is said to have two qualities; it is said that light has three qualities; and water, too, is of four qualities; and earth, abounding with movables and immovables, the divine source of all entities, full of examples of agreeable and disagreeable things , should be understood to be of five qualities 2. Sound, touch, colour likewise, taste, and smell as the fifth—these, O best of the twice-born! should be understood to be the five qualities of earth. Smell always belongs to the earth 3; and smell is stated to be of numerous descriptions. I will state at length the numerous qualities of smell 4. Smell is agreeable or disagreeable, sweet, sour, and bitter likewise, diffusive and compact also, soft, and rough, and clear also 5—thus should
1   This is not clear, unless ‘product’ above means productive, and seed means a product, it being a product of the ańkura or sprout.
     Nîlakantha says, ‘seed = cause; product effect. The unperceived is an effect, and so the contrary doctrine of the Sâńkhya is here
     shown to be wrong. The objects are causes, as their enjoyment causes an impression.’
2    See pp. 285, 286
3   That is to say, smell is the special property of the earth only, the other qualities are common to it with the other elements. The
     word in the original is guna or quality everywhere.
4   See Sânti Parvan (Moksha Dharma), chap. 184, St. 27.
5   Bitter, Nîlakantha exemplifies by the smell of the chili, apparently interpreting katvi, as it may be interpreted, to mean sharp;
     diffusive = overcoming all other smells, like Asafoetida; compact = made up of many smells. Nîlakantha adds, that soft is like
     that of liquid ghee, rough of the oil of mustard, and clear as of cooked rice. The Sânti Parvan passage omits ‘sour.’

384     ANUGÎTÂ.

smell, which belongs to the earth, be understood to be of ten descriptions. Sound, touch, and colour likewise, and taste, are stated to be the qualities of water. I will now give some information about taste. Taste is stated to be of numerous descriptions. Sweet 1, sour, bitter, sharp, astringent, and saltish likewise—thus are the forms of taste, which is a development of water, said to be of six descriptions. Sound, touch, and likewise colour; thus is light said to have three qualities. The quality of light is colour, and colour is stated to be of numerous descriptions. White, black, red likewise, green, yellow, and grey likewise, short, long, narrow 2, broad, square, and circular—thus is the colour of light said to be of twelve forms. It should be understood 3 by aged Brâhmanas, who speak the truth, and are conversant with piety. Sound and touch also should be understood; air is said to have these two qualities. And touch is the quality of air, and touch is stated to be of numerous descriptions. Rough, cold and hot likewise, tender and clear also, hard, glutinous, smooth, slippery, hurtful, and soft 4—thus the quality of air is properly said by Brâhmanas who have reached perfection, who are conversant with piety and perceive the truth, to be of twelve descriptions. Now space has one quality,
1   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 118.
2   Literally, lean and fat. These are rather unusual qualities to attribute to colour. The Sânti Parvan passage gives more.
3   Sic. Does it mean ‘it is understood?’ Cf. Pânini III, 3, 113.
4   Tender=like the touch of a son, &c.; clear=like that of an excellent cloth, Nîlakantha; glutinous =like that of oil; smooth= like that
     of a gem; slippery= not really smooth, but appearing to be such, like that of saliva (?), Arguna Misra. The enumeration of these
     in the Sânti Parvan loc. cit. is again different.
[See: Secret Doctrine vol 1, p534 for more on these two pages. Wiz]

 385     CHAPTER XXXVI, I.

and that is stated to be sound only. I will speak at length of the numerous qualities of sound. Shada, Rishabha, together with Gândhâra, Madhyama, and likewise Pańkama, and beyond these should be understood to be Nishâda and Dhaivata likewise 1; agreeable and disagreeable sound also, compact, and of many ingredients 2 Thus sound, which is produced in space, should be understood to be of ten descriptions. Space is the highest element 3, egoism is above that; above egoism is understanding, and above that understanding is the self 4 above that is the unperceived, and above the unperceived is the being. One who knows which is superior and inferior among entities, and who knows the proper procedure in all actions, and who identifies himself with every being 5, repairs to the imperishable self.


Brahman said:

Since the mind is ruler of these five elements, in the matter of absorbing or bringing them forth 6,
1   This is the Hindu Gamut.
2   These are not in the Sânti Parvan; of many ingredients = collection of sounds, Arguna Misra.
3   Being all-pervading, Arguna Misra. Cf. its position at Taittirîya, p. 67.
4   Cf. Katha, pp. 114, 115, 149, and Sańkarâkârya’s commentary there, for an explanation of the whole passage.
     And see Sâńkhya-sâra, p. 16, as to what are here called self and understanding.
5   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 64, where the words are identical.
6   The elements are perceived or are not perceived by the senses under the direction of the mind; absorbing = destroying;
     bringing forth = producing, Nîlakantha. See p. 268 supra, and Sânti Parvan (Moksha), chap. 240, St. 12.

386     ANUGÎTÂ.

the mind itself is the individual self 1. The mind always presides over the great elements. The understanding proclaims its power 2, and it is called the Kshetragńa. The mind yokes the senses as a charioteer yokes good horses. The senses, the mind, and the understanding are always joined to the Kshetragńa 3. That individual self, mounting the chariot to which big horses 4 are yoked, and in which the understanding is the drag 5, drives about on all sides. The great chariot which is pervaded by the Brahman 6, has the group of the senses yoked to it, has the mind for a charioteer, and the understanding for a drag. That learned and talented person verily, who always understands thus the chariot pervaded by the Brahman, comes not by delusion in the midst of all entities 7. This forest of the Brahman 8 begins with the unperceived, and ends with the gross objects 9 ;
1   The word is the same as at Maitrî, p. 41, the comment on which should be seen.
2   I. e. the mind’s power is to be perceived by itself, Nîlakantha. The meaning seems to be that the understanding can only operate
     on what the mind places before it.
3   The passage at Katha, p. 111 seq., and Sańkara’s commentary there, throw light on this, though the figure is not drawn out in the
      same way in both places. For a definition of Kshetragńa, see Sânti Parvan (Moksha), chap. 187, St. 23.
4   I. e. the senses.
5   I. e. that which holds the horses in check. Nîlakantha seems to render it by ‘whip,’ but that is not correct, I think.
6   So Arguna Misra. Nîlakantha says, ‘The senses, &c., when they turn towards the outer world make the self drive about, as an
      individual self; when turned inwards they show him that he is the Brahman.’ Nîlakantha thus likens this to the Katha passage.
     See also p. 187 and notes there.
7   Or it may mean, among all men.
8   See p. 164 supra, note and p. 285, note 4.
9   That is to say, it includes all Samsâra, all the elements recognised by the Sâńkhya philosophy, save the Being or Purusha.


 387     CHAPTER XXXVI, 12.

and includes movables and immovables, receives light from the radiance of the sun and moon, is adorned with planets and nakshatras, and is decked on all sides with nets of rivers and mountains, and always beautified likewise by various descriptions of waters; it is the means of subsistence for all entities 1, and it is the goal of all living creatures. In this the Kshetragńa always moves about. Whatever entities there are in this world, movable or immovable, they are the very first 2 to be dissolved; and next the developments produced from the elements 3; and after these developments, all the elements. Such is the upward gradation 4 among entities. Gods, men, Gandharvas, Pisâkas, Asuras, Râkshasas, all have been created by nature 5, not by actions, nor by a cause. These Brâhmanas 6, the creators of the world, are born here again and again. And what-
1    Cf. p. 371 supra.
2    Another reading means ‘they are dissolved in the waters.’ As to the order, cf. Vedânta Paribhâshâ.
 [See: Secret Doctrine vol 1, p571. Wiz]
3   I take these to mean the gross elements of which things movable and immovable may be said to be made, if one may use a
     non-idealist phrase in the Sâńkhya philosophy. Then the elements next spoken of are the subtle ones or tanmâtras. Cf. the
     references in note 2. As to developments, see p. 382, note 4.
4   Viz, gross object, gross element, subtle element.
5   The original is svabhâva, which Arguna Misra renders by Prakriti. ‘Actions’ both Nîlakantha and Arguna Misra take to mean
      sacrifices, &c., and ‘cause’ the former interprets by Brahman; the latter by tanmâtras or subtle elements, and adds, ‘the sense is—
      not by sacrifice or tanmâtras only.’ Nîlakantha says, ‘The gods, are produced by nature, as the gods, &c., seen in a dream.’ The
      meaning seems to be that there are energies in nature which evolve these forms of being. Cf. also Gîtâ, p. 65.
6   I presume this means that the patriarchs (Marîki and others, says Nîlakantha) are also born again and again—that is to say, in
     different kalpas, I suppose—by nature only.


388     ANUGÎTÂ.

ever is produced from them 1 is dissolved in due time in those very five great elements, like billows in the ocean. The great elements are in every way beyond the elements that make up the world 2 And he who is released, even from those five elements, goes to the highest goal. The Lord Pragâpati created all this by the mind 3 only. And in the same manner 4 the sages attained the godhead 5 by means of penance 6. And in like manner, those who have achieved perfection, who have acquired concentration by a course of penance, and who likewise feed on fruits and roots, perceive the triple world 7 here by penance. Medicines, and herbs, and the various sciences are all acquired 8 by means of penance alone. For all acquisition 9 has penance for its root. Whatever is difficult to obtain 10, difficult to
1   I think this must mean the elements, though it might at first sight be referred to the Brâhmanas.
2   I. e. the gross elements, I take it; the others are the tanmâtras.
3   I. e. the meditation which constitutes true knowledge, Arguna Misra.
       [See: secret Doctrine vol 1, p 572 on this and the tanmâtras. Wiz]
4   I. e. by the mind, as to which cf. Taittirîya, p. 89; Katha, p, 164. Arguna Misra says, ‘This apparent deviation from the ordinary
      modes of cause and effect is not altogether without parallel, so he adds this to show that.’
5   Literally, ‘the gods,’ but the meaning seems to be that given in the text, as Arguna Misra says.
6   This is only the concentration of mind and senses on one object, Nîlakantha. See p. 166, note I supra.
7   See p. 174 supra.
8   Literally, ‘are accomplished,’ which seems to mean that they are acquired so as to be practically at one’s command when
9   The original word is derived from the same root as the subject of the last note.
10 Difficult to obtain = the seat of Indra, &c.; to learn = Vedas, &c.; to vanquish = fire, &c.; to pass through = a great deluge, &c.,
     Nîlakantha. Arguna Misra seems to interpret the last word, where his reading is doubtful, to mean ‘difficult to do.’

 389     CHAPTER XXXVI, 23.

learn, difficult to vanquish, and difficult to pass through; all that can be accomplished by penance, for penance is difficult to overcome. One who drinks spirituous liquors, one who kills a Brâhmana, one who steals, one who destroys an embryo, one who violates the bed of his preceptor 1, is released from that sin only by penance well performed. Those men, Pitris, gods, sacrificial animals 2, beasts and birds, and all other creatures movable or immovable, who are constantly devoted to penance, always reach perfection by penance. And in like manner the noble minded gods went to heaven 3. Those who without sloth perform actions with expectations, and being full of egoism, they go near Pragâpati 4. Those high-souled ones who are devoid of the thought that this or that is mine, and devoid of egoism, by means of a pure concentration of mind on contemplation, obtain the great and highest world. Those who best understand the self, attaining concentration of mind on contemplation 5, and having their minds always tranquil, enter into the unperceived accumulation of happiness 6. Those
1   Cf. Khândogya, p. 361. Except the destruction of the embryo (see Taitt. Âran. p. 870, but at Brihadâranyaka, p. 795, Kaushîtaki,
     p. 77, and Âpastamba I, 6, 19, 16, the commentators render Bhrűna by ‘learned Brâhmana’), the rest are the great sins. But note
     that stealing gold, not theft generally, is mentioned as a great sin.
2   Or, perhaps, cattle. The original is pasu.
See p.160 supra, and cf. p. 178.
4   I.e. Kasyapa, as gods, &c. This seems to be Arguna Misra’s interpretation. This condition is inferior to that described in the
     following sentence.
5   See p. 162, note 1.
6   Nîlakantha rendering is ‘that by which worldly happiness is heightened.’ He compares Brihadâranyaka, p. 816. See also Taittirîya, p. 11

390     ANUGÎTÂ.

who are free from all thought that this or that is mine, and who are free from egoism, attaining concentration of mind on contemplation 1, enter the highest world of the great, which is the unperceived. Born from that same unperceived 2 principle , again acquiring knowledge, and getting rid of the qualities of passion and darkness, and resorting to the pure quality of goodness, a man gets rid of all sins, and abandons everything as fruitless. He should be understood to be the Kshetragńa. He who understands him understands the Vedas 3. Withdrawing from the mind the objects 4 of mental operations, a sage should sit down self-restrained. He necessarily becomes that on which his mind 5 is fixed. This is the eternal mystery. That which begins with the unperceived and ends with the gross objects 6 is stated to be of the nature of ignorance 7. But you should learn that whose nature is devoid
I    See Gîtâ, p. 128, note 1, where dhyâna and yoga are taken separately. Here the compound is in the singular. Nîlakantha’s
     reading is different.
2   The sense here is not quite clear. It seems, however, to be this. The acquisitions mentioned in the preceding sentence take the
     acquirers to some temporary world from which they afterwards return; but when they get rid of the qualities, they get final
    emancipation. As to the unperceived, cf. inter alia Gîtâ, p. 112, note 2.
3   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 111, and note 2 there. That seems to approach the question from the opposite point of view.
4   So Arguna Misra. At Gîtâ XVI, 16, kitta means the operation itself. That also will do here.
5   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 78; Maitrî, p. 178; Prasna, p. 194; and the quotations at Sâńkhya-sâra, p. 3.
6   This phrase has occurred before; it means all the developments which make up worldly life. See Sâńkhya-sâra, p. 5.
7   See p. 371

 391     CHAPTER XXXVI, 34.

of qualities. Two syllables 1 are death; three syllables the eternal Brahman. Mine is death, and not mine is the eternal 2. Some men of dull understandings extol action. But as to the high-souled ancients they do not extol action 3. By action a creature is born with a body and made up of the sixteen 4. Knowledge brings forth 5 the being, and that is acceptable and constitutes immortality. Therefore those who are far-sighted have no attachment to actions. This being is stated to be full of knowledge, not full of action 6. The self-restrained man who thus understands the immortal, changeless, incomprehensible, and ever indestructible and unattached principle, he dies not 7. He who thus understands the self to which there is nothing prior, which is uncreated, changeless, unmoving 8, which is incomprehensible even to those who feed on nectar, he certainly becomes immortal and not to be restrained 9, in consequence of these means 10.
1   See Sânti Parvan (Râgadharma) XIII, 4. Cf. Maitrî, p. 180. This means the two and three syllables of ‘mama’ and ‘na mama,’
     mine and not mine. Cf. Brihadâranyaka, p. 970, and Khândogya, p. 118, and p. 548, for a similar conceit.
2   Final emancipation follows on abandoning the idea of ‘ mine;’ bondage on harbouring it.
3    See Mundaka, p. 279.
4   The eleven organs and the five great elements which go to form the body. See Sâńkhya-kârikâ 3, and comment thereon;
      Sânti Parvan, chap. 210, St. 32 seq.; chap. 242, St. 7 seq.; Prasna, p. 230.
5   I.e. shows.
6   Cf. Gîtâ, p.118; Sânti Parvan, ch. 242,st. 15.
7   See p. 367 supra, note 6; and cf. Katha, pp. 155, 156.
8   I. e. which remains unconcerned, cf. Îsa, p. 10. Apűrvam (to which there is nothing prior), Arguna Misra renders by ‘not
     familiarly known,’ and Nîlakantha by ‘not understood by any other means of knowledge.’ See also Brihadâranyaka, p. 502,
     and Sańkara on that.
9   This is not very clear, but I suppose the meaning to be the same as that of ‘unconquerable’ at p. 161, and see p. 231.
10  I. e. the means mentioned further on, says Nîlakantha.

392     ANUGÎTÂ.

Expelling all impressions 1, and restraining the self in the self 2, he understands that holy Brahman, than which nothing greater exists. And when the understanding is clear, he attains tranquillity 3. And the nature of tranquillity is as when one sees a dream 4. This 5 is the goal of those emancipated ones who are intent on knowledge. And they see all the movements 6 which are produced by development. This  is the goal of those who are indifferent to the world . This is the eternal piety. This is what is acquired by men of knowledge. This is the uncensured mode of conduct. This goal can be reached by one who is alike to all beings ,7 who is without attachment, who is without expectations,
1   Impressions from external causes. Cf. inter alia Sâńkhya-sűtra III, 83; see, too, pp. 247—358 supra and notes there.
2   I. e. restraining the mind in the lotus-like heart, Nîlakantha. Cf. as to this, pp. 248, 372 inter alia.
3   Cf. Gîtâ, p. 51. See also Maitrî-upanishad, p. 176, and Mundaka, p. 314.
4   Arguna Misra says, ‘The nature of tranquillity is this, that in that state you perceive everything to be unreal like what is seen in a
    dream.’ Nîlakantha says, ‘The nature of tranquillity is this, that in that state the self abides without attachment to the body, and
    any external objects, but working within itself as in a dream.’ But see on this Katha, p. 147.
5   Viz, tranquillity, Nîlakantha.
6   I. e., says Nîlakantha, they see all worldly objects past and future. Arguna Misra, ‘They see the actions performed for some wealth
     and so forth.’ I am not satisfied with either meaning. Arguna Misra’s is besides based on a reading different from that adopted in
     the text, namely, Parimânagâh, instead of Parinâmagâh. I think ‘parinâma’ is the development which, according to the Sâńkhya
     philosophy, produces the universe, and the movements are the actions which that development—namely, here the activity of
     egoism and its products—occasions. Cf. as to some extent supporting this, Sâńkhya-sâra, p. 16.
7   See inter alia Gîtâ, pp. 68—70.


 393     CHAPTER XXXVI, 46.

and who looks alike on everything 1. I have now declared everything to you, O best of Brâhmana sages. Act thus forthwith; then you will acquire perfection.

The preceptor said:

Thus instructed by the preceptor Brahman, those high-souled sages acted accordingly, and then attained to the worlds 2. Do you, too, O noble person, of pure self! duly act according to the words of Brahman which I have stated. Then will you attain perfection.

Vâsudeva said:

That pupil thus instructed in the highest piety by the preceptor, did everything accordingly, O son of Kuntî! and then attained final emancipation. And the pupil, having done all he should have done, attained to that seat, O supporter of the family of the Kauravas! going to which one grieves not 3.

Arguna said:

Who indeed, was that Brâhmana, O Krishna. and who the pupil, O Ganârdana. If this verily is fit to be heard by me, O Lord! then tell it me.

Vâsudeva said:

I 4 am the preceptor, O you of mighty arms! and
1   See inter alia Gîtâ, pp. 68—7o.
2   I. e., I presume, Bhűr and the rest. But see also Khândogya, pp. 272, 541, 620, and Brihadâranyaka, pp. 302, 608.
3   See p. 285 supra, and cf. inter alia Khândogya, p. 550.
4   I. e. I, the Kshetragńa. am the preceptor, and the mind is that which has to be taught. This shows that one’s instructor must be
     oneself, Nîlakantha. Arguna Misra says, ‘I am the preceptor, the mind is the pupil. The meaning of this is that anybody who has
     not acquired knowledge is treated here as a pupil; there is no other special pupil intended.’ Cf. also p. 310 supra.

394     ANUGÎTÂ.

know the mind to be my pupil. And, O Dhanańgaya! I have related this mystery to you out of love for you. If you have love for me, O supporter of the family of the Kauravas! then having heard this instruction relating to the self, always duly act 1 according to it. Then when this piety is duly practised, you will attain the absolute final emancipation, getting rid of all sins. It was this same thing I stated to you before 2 when the time for battle had come, O you of mighty arms. Therefore fix your mind on this. And now 3, O chief of the descendants of Bharata it is long since I saw the lord my father. I wish to see him, with your consent, O Phâlguna 4.

Vaisampâyana said:

When Krishna spoke these words, Dhanańgaya replied saying, O Krishna let us verily go to-day to the city of Gagasa 5. Be pleased, O you who understand piety to see there king Yudhishthira, who is of a devout heart, and after taking leave of him to go to your own city.’
1   Nîlakantha interprets the words without supplying anything, thus ‘be devoted to yama niyama,’ &c. Yama &c. are the eight
     requisites for Yoga or concentration of mind as taught by Patańgali.
2   That is to say, in the Gîtâ .
3   Here he takes up the thread of the story. In the first chapter it was hinted that Krishna was anxious to go to Dvârakâ.
4   This is a name of Arguna.
5   I. e. Hastinâpur, the capital of the Pândavas. They were, when the dialogue was held, at Indraprastha.



Abandonment, 246, 280, 283, 326, 369, 370, 371, 373, 390.
Abhiras, 295.
Abridging, 357.
Absolute, 248, 310, 367,394.
Absorbent, 268, 279, 286, 318.
Absorption, 331, 341, 342, 351, 366, 385, See Assimilation.
Abuse, 323.
Acceptance, 324,325,359,364.
Accomplishment of all duty, 337, 344, 380, 388, 389,393.
Accumulation, 355, 364, 368.
Acquisition, 323, 327, 332, 366, 372, 376, 388, 392.
See Body.
—bond, 307.
—capacity for, 241.
—causes of, 278.
—destruction of, 241, 242.
—evil, 235,238,240,242,257,302, 320.
—exhaustion of, 236, 237, 240,241, 242.
—man of, 253, 256.
—marks of, 239, 321.
—meritorious, 233, 238, 240, 242, 257, 314, 320, 321.
Action, ordinary and special,
—Organs of, 337. See Organs and Senses.
—performance of, 378
—prescribed, 305,309,353,381. See Duty.
—prohibited, 309.
—ripening of, 241.
—world of, 239.
Activity, 319,332, 334, 351, 358,374.
Adhvaryu. See Priest.
Adhyatma, 316, 338, 342. See Soul, science of.
Advice, 369,380.
Affection, 246,250,322,324,342,382.
Affliction, 284, 322,323, 381.
Affluence, 304.
Age, 330,353. See Kalpa.
—old, 233, 247, 249, 250, 289,349,356, 371, 384.
Agitation, 344,366,369.
Agni. 345.
Agnihotra, 321.
Agybhaga, (Ajybhaga) 276.
Ahavaniya, 262.
Ailment, 233,237, 245, 321,343,356.
Aims of life, 314,331, 378.
Air, 260, 289,305, 316, 339, 343,361, 368.
Aitareya-aranyaka, 239,249,250,259,339.
Alarka, 296,297, 298, 299.
Alike to all, 292,356,379,392,393. See Equability.
Alms, 360,361,362,363.
Altar, 262.
Amazement, 300.
Ambarisha, 301,303.
Anandagiri, 251, 266.
Ancients, 260,340,369,378,391. See Elders.
Angirasa, 314.
Animosity, 281,321. See Hatred.
Antelope, 295.
Anus, 258,261.
Anxiety, 302,366,367.
Apana, 258,338. See Life-winds.
Âpastamba, 236, 243,275,291,302,322,353,358, 359, 360,361, 362, 365, 367, 370, 375, 389.
Apsarases, 347.
Arani, 284,308.
Arguna, (Arjuna) 230, 293, 294, 310,393,394. See Bharata, Kunti, and Pritha.
Arka, 346.
Army, 294.
Arrows, 294,296,297, 298,299, 300, 301.
Arteries, 257.
Artisans, 365.
Asafoetida, 383.
Ascent, 321,385.
Ascetics, 232,246, 289,290,292,293,312,316354 358,363.
Ashes, 276.
Asramas, (Ashramas) 307,315. See Order.
Assimilation with Brahman, 253, 308, 313, 316, 342,370.
Astringent, 363,384.
Astrologers, 377.
Asvalayana, 236,358.
Asvattha, 247.
Atomists, 377.
Atri, 314.
Attachment, 232,236,241,242,246,250,289,322, 324, 328, 341, 357, 362, 364, 365, 367, 368,
371,377, 379, 391,392.
Attainment to Brahman, 230,257, 287, 339, 348, 367, 369, 370, 372, 373, 385, 392. See Brahman.
Auspicious act, 324.
Authority, 243.
Avarice, 284, 302, 303, 320, 332, 335, 344, 357, 361, 378. See Affection.
Avimukta, 257.
Axe, 294.

Backbiting, 323, 326, 364.
Bamboo, 346,359.
Barley-seed, 353.
Bathing, 361, 364,375,377.
Battlefield, 294,296, 323,394.
Beasts, 284,289, 290,321,345,353,356,389.
Bees, 309.
Beginning and end and middle, 307,335,351,352.
Being Supreme, 281,284. See Brahman.
Belongings, 247, 324, 365,369, 373.
Benefit, 309, 324, 325, 360.
Bharadvaga, 314.
Bharata, 231,254,255,256,394.
Bhargava, 314.
Bhartrihari, 239.
Bhasa, 346.
Bhur, 393.
Bhutas, 306,345, 354.
Bile, 343.
Bilva, 360.
Birds, 321,345, 353,371,389.
Birth, 231, 233, 237, 239, 241, 245, 247, 257, 302, 313,339, 341, 390.
—after lapse of time, 339.
—freedom from, 241.
—previous. See Life.
—repeated, 242, 302, 325, 361, 367, 371, 378, 387. See Return.
Birth, sinful, 255.
Bitter, 363,383,384.
Blindness, 320, 322.
Blood, 241,252, 275, 335,342.
Boat, 381,382.
—city of nine portals, 317.
—development of, 252.
—distinct from soul, 375.
—distribution of, on death, 290, 302.
—leaving, 235, 237, 238, 239, 250, 252, 253, 255, 257, 266,331.
—liquids in, 342.
—movement of 343.
—source of, 244.
—subtle, 333.
—support of, 291, 318, 359, 363,366.
—supporter of, 262.
Bond, 246, 247, 248, 317, 323, 342, 351, 355, 368, 371,391.
Bone, 252, 343.
Books, 326.
Brahma, 231,234,244, 257,264,271, 312, 314,315,
317, 323, 325, 328, 332, 333, 337, 339, 345,
352, 354, 355, 360, 372, 378, 385, 393. See Priest.
—brahmana, 265, 276, 277, 280.
Brahma Gita, 255, 310.
Brahmakarin, (Brahmacharin) 242, 283, 284, 312, 316, 326, 354, 358, 360,361,362, 364.
Brahman, 230, 234, 235, 238, 241, 243, 244, 245,
246, 248, 250, 251, 252, 253, 255, 257, 258,
260, 265, 277, 282, 283, 284, 286, 287, 288,
296, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, 312, 313, 316,
317, 326, 327, 336, 339, 341, 342, 344, 347,
354, 367, 368, 369, 372, 375, 377, 386, 387,
391, 392.
Breath, 238,252, 270, 276, 341. See life-winds.
Bridge of piety, 315, 348.
Brihadaranyakopanishad, 239, 249, 251, 255, 258,
259, 261,264, 268, 271, 274, 279, 283, 287,
289, 290, 295, 304, 313, 314, 324, 327, 342,
Brihaspati, 314, 346.
Brothers, 290.
Buddhism, 306, 376.
Buhler, 1. G., Dr., 353.
Burning taste, 279.

Car, great, 381, 382, 386.
Carnal. See love.
Caste, 315, 316, 320, 322, 329,358.
Cattle, 345, 389.
Cause, 247, 278, 309, 335, 383,387, 388, 392.
Ceremonies, 293,321,322,353,358,361,366,370.
Change, 327,331,345,356,372. See Development.
Chariot, 294,380. See Car.
Charioteer, 338, 386.
Charity, 324.
Chastity, 275.
Circular, 384.
Circumference, 306.
Cleanness, 359, 360, 363, 364.
Clear, 383, 384, 392. See Undistinguished.
Cold, 238,384.
Cold and heat, 284, 323, 356.
Color, 247,252,258,260,285,286,342,368.
Compassion, 231, 243, 326, 359, 362, 364.
Concentration, 232, 242, 243, 247, 248, 251, 254,
255, 257, 279, 280, 285, 287, 299, 301, 315,
326, 332, 340, 342, 344, 360, 361, 362, 363,
366, 368, 388, 389, 390,394.
Conduct, 232, 243, 283, 312, 320, 324, 341, 358,
359, 362, 364, 367, 368, 369, 378, 392.
Confusion, 254,269, 308, 377.
Conjunction, 330.
Consciousness, 238, 239,242,245, 290, 334, 350, 356, 359.
Consonants, 348.
Constant, 248, 289, 331, 332, 360, 369, 375, 376.
Constituents, 246,318,336,343,344.
Contact with objects, 335, 343.
Contemplation, 234, 245, 283, 309, 389, 390.
Contentment, 240,286,288,302,325,326,334,361.
Continence, 361, 389.
Convictions, 239, 304, 305.
Cotton, 300.
Counsellor, 280, 283.
Country, 342.
Courage, 288, 301, 302, 325, 332, 373.
Cow, 265,353.
Created things, 234, 258, 260, 262.
Creation, 313, 317, 332, 333, 334, 340, 344, 345, 347,351, 352, 388.
Creator, 231, 315, 334, 338, 347, 354, 377, 387.
Cruelties, 243, 323, 326.
Currents, 238, 318, 321, 322, 325, 327, 329, 343.

Daityas. See Demons.
Dakshina, 261, 280.
Danavas, 354.
Darkness, 239, 276, 278, 284, 301, 302, 318, 319, 320, 321, 322, 323,
328, 329, 330, 331, 334, 345, 349, 356, 379, 390.
Dasahotri &c., 262 seq., 266.
Davids, T. W. R., 306.
Day and night, 276, 277,330,352, 354, 356.
Death, 232, 233, 237, 238, 249, 250, 270, 289, 290,
297, 298, 322, 348, 349, 355, 368, 371, 372, 380,381,391.
—certainty of, 355.
Deities, 243, 259, 276, 279,317, 334, 337, 343, 347,
353,358, 361, 362, 367. See Organs.
Deity, form of, 76, 78, 80. See Brahman, and Krishna.
Deluge, 260, 388.
Demon, 257,282, 283,321,345,347,387.
Desire, 233, 241, 246, 263, 269, 275, 283, 284, 288,
289, 300, 302, 313, 314, 322, 323, 324, 325,
326, 327, 342, 344, 347, 349, 356, 357, 364,
365, 366, 369, 370, 376,381.
—capacity of obtaining, 287, 327, 332, 373. See Objects of desire.
—of action, 355. See Action, destruction of.
—of entities, 250,276,307,335,357,365,376,378.
—of food, 279.
—of worlds, 314.
—time of, 237.
Determination, 255,260,268, 299, 348, 349, 350, 368,377.
Devamata, 274, 275.
Devayana, 314, 316.
Development, 288, 318, 331, 334, 370, 372, 375, 382,387, 392.
—of intelligence, 293.
Devotee, 243,248, 249, 266.
Devotion, 232, 243, 255, 299, 308, 310, 311, 324, 349,360, 361, 362,368, 369, 381, 389.
Devout, 394. See Pure.
Dexterity, 326,362.
Dhaivata, 385.
Dhammapada, 241.
Dhanangaya, 230, 310, 394.
Dharma, 306.
Dhatu. See Elements.
Dialogue, 263. See Itihasa.
Difficult deeds, 296,300.
Difficulty, 388, 389.
Digestion, 236, 252, 273, 275.
Din, 356.
Director, 281, 385.
Discernment, 256, 320,331.
Disparagement of gods &c., 320.
Disposition,—evil, 320.
Disrespect, 324, 368.
Dissolution, 317, 335, 344,387.
Distinction, 285, 331, 335, 341, 370, 374, 375, 381.
Distraction, 269, 377. See Confusion.
Distribution of food, 273, 275.
Diversity, 313, 344, 374.
—nature, 367,383.
—speech, 265.
Division, 327,381.
Doctrine,—holy, 255, 256.
Doubt, 260, 375, 376. See Objects of sense.
Downfall, 233,355. See Fall.
Dravidas, 225, 295.
Dream, 249,269, 387, 392.
Drink, 236, 259, 279, 354, 389.
Duty, 231, 247, 255, 291, 295, 296, 302, 322, 325,
326, 329, 348, 359, 360, 361, 362, 364, 365,
378, 393. See Action, Right and wrong,
Dvaraka, 230, 394.

Earnings, 363, 364. See Gain.
Ears, 253, 259, 261, 290. See Senses.
Earth, 260, 261, 290, 291, 303, 304, 305, 339, 343, 352, 364, 365, 381.
Eating, 236, 269, 279, 321, 353, 358, 362, 363, 364,365.
Eclipses, 330.
Effect, 383,388. See Cause.
Eggs, 321, 339, 353.
Ego and non-ego, 377.
Egoism, 246, 280, 287, 313,317,318,326,332,333, 334, 335,
336, 338, 350, 355, 356, 362, 366,
368, 370, 371, 382, 383, 385, 389, 390, 392.
Elders, 291. See Ancients.
Elements, 238, 245, 246, 247, 334, 335, 340, 343, 346, 348,
352, 353, 355, 357, 368, 371, 376,
377, 382, 385, 386, 387,388, 391.
—subtle, 285, 287, 313, 317.
Elephant, 345.
Embryo, 389.
Emperor, 232.
End, evil, 243.
—of the great cause, 287.
End of things, 354, 355.
Endurance, 246, 323.
Enemy, 246,282, 283, 296, 300.
—destruction of, 302.
—restrainer of, 231, 253, 312.
Energy, 255, 387.
Enjoyment, 236, 240, 241, 268, 269, 283, 289, 290, 291,
300, 304, 327, 328, 334, 365, 375, 379, 383.
Enlightenment, 265, 287, 293, 325, 329, 333, 348, 351,356, 373.
Entities, 244,260,292, 312, 313, 315, 316, 317, 318,
333, 335, 337, 338, 339, 341, 342, 347, 351,
352, 353,357, 367, 368,369, 370, 386,387.
Entity, real, 307, 308, 309, 312, 333, 335, 343, 370, 372.
Entrance into the Supreme, 285. See Assimilation and Essence.
Environment, 355.
Equability, 325, 326, 359, 366,372, 373.
Error, 369. See Conviction.
Essence, 370,379, 382.
Eternal, 230, 233, 238, 241, 245, 247, 248, 255,265,
277, 313, 314, 317, 331, 334, 339, 350, 376, 391.
Everlasting, 233,317, 355,369, 370.
Evil, 247, 276, 277, 289, 366.
Excretions, 236, 252, 261, 336, 338. See Organs and Senses.
—menstrual, 275.
Excretive organs, 297.
Exercise, 236,323,360. See Power.
Exhalation, 264, 265, 372.
Existence, 292, 351, 377.
Existence and non-existence, 277, 331, 375, 377.
Expanse, 258.
Expectation, 292, 324, 326, 365, 366, 367, 378,389, 392
Experience, 231, 245, 248, 249, 250, 253, 256, 263, 309, 316, 342, 344, 368.
Expiation, 324.
Exultation and grief, 249, 285, 300,325.
Eye, 253, 258, 259,260, 290, 307,347,359, 366. See Senses.
—divine, 239.
—on all sides, 332.
Eyelid, opening and closing, 356, 372.

Faces downwards, 287.
—in all directions, 253, 332, 345.

Faith, 255, 316, 319, 320, 321, 324, 325,
358, 365, 366, 378.
Fame, 236, 287, 358.
Fancies, 247, 284, 288, 355.
Fasts, 283, 324.
Fat, 384.
Father, 233, 243, 290, 303,304, 394.
Faults, 247, 293, 320.
Favour, 310, 372.
Favorite, 230, 394.
Fear, 250, 285, 287, 292, 294, 295, 320, 325, 329, 330,344, 357, 362.
Feathered arrows, 298.
Feeling, 288. See Organs and Senses.
Feet, 235, 253, 261, 332, 339, 359, 367, 380.
Females, 241,255,275, 277, 287, 295, 324, 346,347.
Fire, 242, 247, 257, 259, 260, 261, 262, 268, 270, 271, 276, 277, 279, 283, 288, 307, 308, 319,
336, 338, 342, 346, 353, 360, 362, 380, 388.
First, 345, 352 seq.
Fisherman, 382.
Flesh, 252, 335, 343, 367.
Flower and fruit, 285, 286, 309, 313, 365, 371, 388.
Flowing element, 342.
Foe, terror of, 232, 234,311.
Foetus, 241, 242.
Food, 233, 235, 238, 252, 254, 270, 279, 343, 353, 360,363, 364, 388. See Eating.
—digestion and distribution of, 273, 277.
Forest, 217, 259, 284, 285, 286, 288, 307, 316, 342, 345, 354, 358, 361, 362, 363, 372, 386.
Forgetfulness of Arguna, (Arjuna) 230.
—of Krishna, 230.
Forgiveness, 320, 321, 325,326, 359, 362, 373.
Formless, 233, 247.
Fortnight, 316, 330, 352, 356.
Fragrance, 247, 257, 258, 286, 291, 309.
Free, 243, 342.
Freedom from action, 256,257, 362.
Frenzy, 323.
Friend, 233, 246, 290, 295, 364.
Fruit, connexion of, with action, 236, 240, 243, 264, 307, 312,
325, 326, 348, 355, 365, 369, 373, 380, 382.
Fuel, 247, 259, 261, 268, 283, 286, 290, 291, 307, 308,342.
Future, 269, 314, 325, 331, 366, 392. See Entities and World.

Gagasa, 394.
Gahnavi. See Ganges.
Gainas, (Jainas) 224, 225, 226, 364.
Gamadagni, 294, 295, 300.
Gambling, 324.
Gambu, 346.
Gamut, 385.
Ganaka, 303, 304, 306.
Ganardana, 233, 393.
Ganas, 346.
Gandhara, 385.
Gandharvas, 347, 387.
Ganges, 354.
Garhapatya, 262.
Gastric. See Fire.
Gaudapada, 324, 376.
Gautama, 236, 314, 353, 354, 359, 362, 363, 365. See Buddhism.
Gayatri, 353.
Generation, 250,287,336. See Organs and Senses.
Genital organ, 261,336,338.
Germs, 339.
Ghee, 384.
Gifts, 242, 282, 320, 321, 324, 325, 326, 330, 340, 359, 364,376. See Dakshina.
Gishnu, 332.
Glow-worm, 239.
Goal, 231, 233, 255, 256, 258, 311, 315, 333, 349, 358, 372, 387, 388, 392.
Goat, 290, 321,353.
Goddess, 347.
Gods, 241, 250, 254, 255, 282, 283, 305, 306, 316, 320,
322, 324, 327, 331, 338, 345, 347, 354,
377, 387, 389, 390.
Gold, 333,353,365,389.
Goodness, 276, 278, 300, 306, 318, 319, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330, 331,334,373,374, 376.
Gradation, 381,385, 387, 388.
Grandsire, 244, 271, 289, 295, 300, 303, 304, 314, 374.
Greatness, 333,347,354.
Greatness of Supreme, 287, 336.
Grief, 250, 284, 285, 301, 320, 326, 327, 343, 354, 355, 356, 366, 393. See Sorrow.
Guests, 243,285,286,306,358,361,364.
Guru. See Preceptor.
Guruskandha, 346.

Habit of pondering, 250.
Habitation, 251. See Dwelling.
Hall, F. E., 244, 280, 285, 300 317, 327, 332, 333, 334, 337, 338, 373, 390, 392.
Hamilton, Sir W., 378.
Hamsa, 381.
Hands, 261, 359,367.
—joining, 294, 311.
—on all sides, 253, 332.
Happiness, 233, 242, 250, 255, 270, 285, 300, 311, 314, 325, 341, 342, 347, 348, 369, 378, 380,
389. See Enjoyment, Pleasure.
Hari, 347.
Harmlessness, 325, 364,373,376.
Hastinapur, 394.
Hatha-yoga, 297.
Hatred, 281, 288, 289, 301,320,323, 365.
Haug, M., 276,277.
Head, 238, 253, 332, 367.
Headstrong, 320.
Hearing, 246, 258, 259, 309, 351.
Heart, 232,239,242,251,252,278,281,282,283,
 287, 293, 303, 308, 332, 342, 345, 350, 361, 394.
Heat, 237,329,330.
Heaven, 240,264,281, 289,290,307, 322, 325,327, 344, 360, 361, 362, 368,389.
—voice from, 295.
Heaviness, 320, 327. See Lazy.
Heedlessness, 253, 324, 359.
Hell, 233, 240,259,321, 378.
Helpless, 336,365.
Herbs, 346,388. See Vegetables.
Hermitage, 285,294.
Hero, 295.
Highest, 244,309,326,336,342,344,347,351,354, 368, 369,372, 389, 390. See Supreme.
High-souled, 294,295,296,314,327,348,389,391, 393.
Hill, 284,287.
Himalaya, 346.
Hiranyagarbha, 315, 333.
Holes, dwellers in, 345.
Honor, 243, 246,302, 361, 363.
Horses, 381,386.
Hospitality, 286,294. See Guest.
Hot, 246, 384.
Hotri. See Priest.
Householder, 307, 316, 354, 358, 360, 362, 377.
Hrishikesa, 242, 248, 270, 363,367.
Humility, 314, 326. See also Modesty.
Hunger, 356,359.
Husband and wife, 256.
Hymns, 280. See Saman.

Ida, 257, 277, 318.
Idealism, 387.
Identification with Brahman, 234, 283, 385. See Unity.
—of self with all, 246, 307, 310.
Identification of self with wife &c., 248.
Idiots, 321.
Ignorance, 267,319, 322, 357,390.
—about Supreme, 309.
Image, 242.
Immaturity, 320.
Immortal, 244. 255, 282, 313, 343, 357, 367, 372, 373,391.
Immovable, 266, 307, 321, 330, 331, 353, 355,383, 387. See Movable.
Impassable, 284, 285, 389.
Imperceptible, 234, 241.
Imperishable, 245, 248,357,367,385.
Impermanence. See Perishable.
Impiety, 246, 319, 348. See Piety.
Impression, 247, 264, 266,318, 358, 383, 392.
Improvement, 321.
Inaccessible, 295.
Inanimate creation, 244.
Incarnation, See Manifestation.
Inclination, 282,283,318.
Incomprehensible, 391. See Unknowable.
Inconstancy, 287, 289, 335.
Incontinent, 236.
Independence, 326.
Indestructible, 244, 248,257,292, 391.
Indicative use of words, 272.
Indifference, means of, 341.
—to worldly objects, 233, 247, 326, 341, 365, 366, 392.
Indigent, 256, 304, 376.
Indignities, 233.
Indolence, 320. See Lazy.
Indra, 250, 261, 282, 316,338,346,388.
Indraprastha, 394.
Indu, 346.
Inexhaustible, 250, 332, 372.
Inference, 291,367, 373,374.
Infidel, 378.
Infinite, 344,348.
Initiation, 285, 286, 347,361.
Injury, 318, 323. See Harmlessness.
Insects, 321, 339.
Inspiration, 281.
Instruction, 248, 251,254,264, 281, 282, 283, 290, 312, 324, 359, 365,393, 394.
Instrument, 278,348,357,365.
Intellect, 257,309,320.
Intelligence, 234, 241, 242,263, 269,276,284, 286, 296, 304, 305, 308,311, 332, 371, 381.
Intent, 304,392. See Concentration.
Intoxicating drinks, 279.
Invincible, 389.
Iron, 242.
Isopanishad, 248,305,391.
Isvara, 315,354.
Itihasa, ancient, 238, 256, 261, 268, 270,274, 277, 282,289, 293, 296,303,310.

Jewels, 347, 353.
Joint, 237,258,356.
Joy, 284,300, 301, 325,326,357,363, 378.
Juice, 236, 238,252, 363.

Kakrapravartana. See Wheel, turning of.
Kakravartin, (Chakravartin) 232.
Kalpa, 387.
Kamadhenu. See Cow.
Kandala, 322,343.
Karmakanda. See Vedas.
Kartavirya, 293.
Karvalca, 376, 377.
Kasvapa, 231, 232, 234, 235, 245, 314,389.
Kathopanishad, 233, 234, 246, 247, 249, 253, 264, 286,
313, 317, 333, 337, 338, 339, 341, 346,
370,385, 386, 388,391, 392.
Katurhotra, 277.
Kaunteya. See Kunti.
Kauravas, 311,312, 393,394.
Kaushitaki-upanishad, 249, 259, 264, 268, 271, 277, 314, 362, 389.
Kenopanishad, 257.
Kesava, 230.
Khandogya-upanishad, (Chandogya) 233, 234, 236, 239, 241,
243, 246, 249, 252, 258,
259, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 268, 269, 270,
271, 277, 285, 287, 290, 291, 295, 312, 314,
320, 321, 322, 331, 337, 339, 340, 345, 347.
353, 389,391, 393.
King, 233, 294, 296, 299, 303, 346, 347, 348. See Ruler.
Kingdom, 302,303,304, 305
Kinnaras, 347,354.
Kinsmen, 233, 246, 281, 294.
—branches of, 315.
—ceasing of, 239. See Perception.
—constancy in. See Perseverance.
—eye of, 239.
—highest, 240,261.
—imperfect, 309.
—man of, 373, 392.
—modification of, 312.
—object of, 262,310, 312, 382.
—of creation, 341.
—of self, 334.
—of truth, 335,348,381.
—practical, 349.
—pursuit of. See Perseverance.
—source of, 248, 308.
—subject of, 262.
—sword of, 371.
—within oneself, 380.
Koshthavat, 346.
Krishna, 230, 231, 254, 284, 310, 393, 394. See Brahman.
—Dvaipayana. See Vyasa.
Krita, 353.
Kritavirya. See Kartavirya.
Kshatriyas, 255,295, 300, 329,345.
—kinsmen of, 295, 296.
Kshetra, 310,350,372.
Kshetragna. (Kshetrajna) 253, 284, 287, 288, 293, 308,
310, 350, 351, 352, 374, 377, 378, 379,
386, 387, 390, 393.
Kubera, 347.
Kulluka Bhatta, 262.
Kumarasambhava, 257.
Kunti, 254,393.

Labour, 323, 324.356.
Ladle, 261.
Lalita Vistara, 261,275, 284,289,337.
Lamp, 242, 253.
Lances, 294.
Land, 339, 382.
Law, 268, 269. See Regulations.
Lazy, 320,326. See Indolence.
Leaf, 313, 361,365, 371, 374.
Learning, 232, 239, 269, 308, 326, 341, 348, 353, 359,388,389. See Instruction and Study.
Leibnitz, 268.
Letters, 264.
Life, 246, 268, 269, 276, 279, 289, 290, 291, 295, 302, 317, 318, 321, 325, 355, 357.
See Birth and Death.
—conditions of, 233.
—course of, 233, 235, 243, 245, 253, 258, 259, 284,
285, 287, 306, 312, 313, 338, 341, 355, 357,
359,361,368, 370, 386, 390.
—exhaustion of, 236.
—forms of, 321.
—higher, 285, 322.
Life, limit of, 244, 311.
—long, 236.
—previous, 243, 244.
—subtle, 284.
Life-winds, 237, 238, 242, 246, 257, 258, 259, 263,
264, 265, 266, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275,
276, 277, 280, 289, 299, 292, 318, 331, 336,
353,372, 373.
—concentration of. See Breath.
—production and preservation of, 238.
Light, 260, 305, 316, 319, 330, 332, 334, 344, 369, 379,380,387. See Object of sense.
Lightness, 319,327,332.
Lightning, 337, 340.
Likes and dislikes, 288, 289. See Affection and Aversion.
Limbs, 242,342,359,366.
Limitation. See Perfection and Time.
Lion, 295,345.
—manner of, 353.
Liquors, 389.
Lisping, 322.
Lokayatas. See Karvakas.
Lord, 231, 263, 267, 293, 294, 303, 333, 345, 347, 388,393,394
—of beings, 273.
—supreme, 352.
Lotus-eye, 294.
—heart, 342,344,392
—leaf, 289,374,379.
Love, 394.
Lower species, 241, 330,339.
—mansions, 346, 352, 387.
—world, 240.
Lust, 233,246,325,331,359.

Madhava, 230,231, 252.
Madhu, 231, 252.
Madhyama, 385.
Madhyamika Bauddhas, 376.
Maghavat, 347.
Mahabharata, 234, 253, 256, 271, 281, 284, 292,
295, 301, 304, 305, 308, 310, 315, 318. 319,
325, 328, 329, 342, 344, 351, 353, 354, 358,
360, 370, 374, 383, 384, 385, 386, 391. See Bhishma Parvan.
Mahabhashya. See Patangali (Patanjali).
Mahat. See Understanding.
Mahendra, 346.
Mahesvari, 347.
Mahidhara, 248.
Maitri-upanishad, 233, 234, 238, 241, 243, 247, 251, 252, 255, 259, 263, 268, 269, 270, 271,
274, 277, 305, 320, 323, 361, 370, 371, 378,
Male, 346.—and female, 244.
Mallinath, 293.
Malyavat, 346.
Management, 324.
Mandukya-upanishad, 247, 251, 259, 324,376.
Manes, 296,306, 324, 325,345,366, 389.
Manifestation, 292, 312, 317, 318, 374, 379, 380. See Incarnation, and Nature.
Mankind, 345, 347, 348, 353, 354, 356, 378, 386, 387,389.
Mantras, 264.
Manu, 233, 262, 279, 284, 339, 353, 354, 358, 359,
360,361, 362, 363, 364, 365,368.
Mariki, 387.
Marrow, 252.
Maruts, 346.
Material cause. See Cause and Nature.
Matted hair, 360,375.
Matter, 379.
Means, 376,377,380,391. See Wealth.
Meat, 236.
Medicine, 388.
Meditation, 248, 249, 251, 252, 299, 300, 332, 341,
349,353,368,376,377,382, 388.
—at time of death, 390.
—continuous, 309. See Concentration of mind.
Memory, 320,332, 335.
Mendicancy, 307,361.
Merit, 232, 241, 246, 341,376, 377.
Meru, 354.
Meshasringa, 346.
Metre, 353.
Migration, 232,234,244.
Military. See Kshatriyas.
Milk, 265.
Mimamsa, 376,377.
Mind, —movable and immovable, 264.
Mine, 279, 292, 303, 304, 305, 313, 323, 326, 332,
Minute, 327,332.
Mirage  253
Misgivings, 231, 263, 282, 311, 312, 320, 324,374.
Mithila, 304,305.
Mitra, 338,345.
Mlekkhas, (Miechchas) 353.
Moderation. See Eating.
Modesty, 281,306,326. See Humility.
Momentary existence, 376.
Months, 255,330,352, 356.
Moon, 257,261,277, 327, 330,338,346, 350,387.
Mortal, form, 255.
Mortals, 255,297.
Mother, 233,243, 290.
Motive. See Action.
Mountain, 284,287,295, 346,354,363,381,387.
Movable, 243, 266, 307, 311, 315, 335, 366, 387,
389. See Immovable.
Movement, 274, 291, 392.
—concealed, 232, 235.
—of mind, 263. See Quiescence.
—of world, 334,340, 355,356,358.
Moving, 261, 338.
—everywhere, 232, 312, 370.
Mucus, 343.
Mud, 343, 350.
Muir,J., Dr., 295,304,305,347.
Muladhara, 251.
Muller, Max, Prof., 339.
Mundakopanishad, 230, 241, 244, 259, 312, 313,
315, 316, 333, 339, 348,371, 391, 392.
Munga, 249,360.
Murder, 290, 291, 293, 295, 296,323, 324, 389.
Music, 325.
Mustard, 384.
Mystery, 230,254, 278, 377, 390,394.

Nagas, 347.
Nails, 356.
—Naishthika, 377.
Narada, 274, 275.
Narayana, 280, 281.
Natakas. See Kavyas.
Nature, 235, 244, 245, 253, 260, 288, 289, 313,318,
327, 331, 333, 335, 350, 351, 355, 357, 367,
370, 371, 372, 374, 376, 377, 378, 379, 380,
382, 387, 390.
Navel, 258,266, 271.
Neck, 252.
Nectar, 391.
Net, 289, 387.
Nether world, 321. See Hell.
Night, 362, 363.
Nihilism, 320.
Nila, 346.
Nilgiri. See Nila.
Nirukta, 265.
Nishada, 385.
Nitisataka. See Bhartrihari.
—mind, 264,295, 300, 316, 323,325, 389, 393.
Noise, 251.
Noisy speech, 265.
Nose, 257, 258,259, 267, 343,349. See Senses.
Notion, false, 253.
Nyagrodha, 346.

Obedience, 324, 358.
Object, 378,379, 382. See Subject.
—of desire, 289. See Desire and Enjoyment.
—of gift, 324.
Observances, 283, 324, 355, 364.
Obstacles, 279,363.
Ocean, 245, 293, 294, 296, 307, 343, 346, 354, 374,
381, 388.
Offence, 256,303. See Sin.
Offering, 260, 261, 262, 276, 279,
280, 325, 353, 358, 360,371.
Oil, 379, 384.
Old age. See Age.
—times, 314, 316, 358.
Om, 282,353.
Omens, 365.
Omission and commission, 359.
Omniscience and omnipotence, 234.
One, 317,375.
Order, 307,354,358,382. See Asramas (Ashramas).
—of dissolution of entities, 335, 387.
Ordinances. See Rule and Scripture.
Organs, 243, 247, 257,258,261,271, 287,292,318, 336,337, 357, 359,364,391.
Ornaments, 326.

Pain, 233, 238, 239, 245, 250, 291, 292, 301. See Pleasure and pain.
Pairs, 233, 244, 246, 247, 257, 276, 277, 292, 351, 357,358, 366,369, 370, 379.
Palasa, 360.
Palate, 252, 262.
Pandava, 230,255, 394.
Pankahotri, 270.
Pankama, 385.
Paramahamsa, 381.
Parasurama, 294, 295, 299.
Pariyatra, 346.
Partha. See Pritha.
Parvati, 347.
Passages of body, 253,265,273,275,277,318,343. See Body.
—of heart, 252.
Passion, 276,278, 292, 301,302, 318,319,323,325, 328,
329, 330, 331, 334, 342, 343, 345, 356, 363,369,390.
Patangali, (Patanjali) —Mahabhashya, 346.
Path. 248, 257, 284, 307, 311, 314, 316, 320, 331, 348, 364, 369, 380,381.
Paths, three, 354.
—unfamiliar, 380.
Patriarchs, 354, 387.
Paundra, 295.
Peace, 323.
Pebbles, 365.
Pedestrian, 382.
Perceptible, 257, 264, 309, 313,377, 380,385,386.
Perception of worlds, 238, 270, 316, 329,331,336. See Organs and Senses.
Perfect, 248, 251, 287.
Perfection, 232, 233, 234, 287, 300, 302, 310, 314, 334,384, 388, 389,393.
Perishable, 304, 307, 355, 375,376.
Perseverance, 255.
Perspiration, 339.
Pervading principle, 242, 244, 253, 258, 307, 317, 332,385.
Phalguna, 394.
Philosopher, 377.
Phlegm, 343.
Pingala, 257,277,318.
Pippala, 346.
Pisakas, 345, 354, 387.
Pitris. See Manes.
Pitriyana, 314.
Placid, 234, 245. See Tranquillity.
Plaksha, 354.
Planet, 303,346, 387.
Pleasure, 265, 268, 270, 275, 280, 292, 300, 301, 311,
316, 322, 324, 325, 330, 341, 354, 355, 357,389.
—and pain, 245, 246, 285,323, 356, 376.
—higher, 287.
—within oneself, 253. 288, 380. See Gods and Happiness.
Power, 287,303,323,332,360,385.
—creative, 260, 279, 327.
—mystic, 230.
Power of Brahman,
—regard to one’s own, 237.
—superhuman, 260.
Pragapati, (Prajapati) 244, 261, 262, 263, 264, 265, 271,
282, 315, 316, 334, 338, 345, 347, 353, 388,389. See Creator.
Prakriti. See Nature.
Prana, 258. See Life-winds.
Pranayama. See Breath, control of.
Prasastri, 280.
Prasnopanishad, 271, 390, 391.
Pratyahara. See Senses.
Preya. See Sreya.
Pride, 264, 294, 301, 320, 323, 341.See Vanity.
Priest, 241, 259, 261, 266, 267, 270, 276, 278, 279, 280, 289, 290, 293.
Primeval, 333.
Pritha, 230,231,254,255,256,281,311,312.
Production and destruction, 287, 314, 316, 317, 319, 327,
331, 351, 357, 372, 385, 388. See Entities.
---sevenfold, 260.
Progress, 380,381.
Property, 255, 305, 379, 383.
Prostration, 232.
Prowess, 324. See Valour.
Punishment, 303.
Pupil, 252, 254, 262, 269, 282, 283, 308, 310, 311, 312, 315, 373, 378. See Student.
Purandara, 347.
Pure, 246, 247, 254, 336, 355, 359, 360, 362, 369, 390, 393. See Heart, and Sanctification.
Purity, 233, 243, 320, 326.
Purusha. See Spirit.
—sukta, 280.
Purushottama. See Being.

Quadrupeds, 321, 339, 353.
Qualifications, 279, 312, 348, 358.
—all-pervading, 331.
—development of, 328, 329.
—different from soul. See Soul.
—effects of, 332.
—enjoyer of, 247, 328.
—forms of, higher and lower, 323.
—increase and diminution of, 328.
—prevalence of, 319, 328, 373.
Quarters, 261, 268, 282, 290, 316, 337, 340, 347, 354.
—of life as a Brahmakarin (Brahmacharin). See Brahmakarin (Brahmachann).
Question, 231, 235, 252, 283, 311, 312, 314, 374.
Quiescence, 245, 263. See Mind.
Quitting body. See Body, leaving.

Radiance, 387. See Light.
Ragadharma (Rajadharma). See Mahabharata.
Raga-yoga, (Raja-yoga) 300.
Raghuvamsa, 293.
Rahasyas. See Upanishads.
Rahu, 303.
Rakshas, 345, 347, 354, 387.
Rama, 294, 300.
Ramanuga, 346, 378.
Rays, 287, 289.
Real and unreal, 323, 392. See Entity, real.
Recognition, 249.
Refinement, 308, 358, 361, 369.
Regulation, 254, 257, 269, 279, 283, 288, 291, 296, 307,
311, 312, 315, 316, 320, 321, 324, 326,
355, 356, 358, 359, 360, 361, 367.
Renunciation, 257, 312, 349, 361, 369, 373, 376, 377.
Reptiles, 284, 339, 353.
Reservoir, 344, 354, 381.
Residence. 233, 240, 250, 260, 287.
Resolution, 314. See Determination.
Resource, 377.
Respect, 246, 283, 324, 363.
Restraint, 232, 242, 243, 248, 251, 257, 282, 296,
297, 301, 306, 336, 342, 344, 355, 358, 360,
361, 362, 364, 372, 391, 392.
—mutual, 315.
Return to birth, 234, 306, 322, 390. See Birth.
Revelation. See Vedas.
Revolution, 356, 357. See Universe and Wheel.
Right and wrong, 319,366. See Duty.
Righteous feeling, 326.
Rik, 277, 280, 284.
Rikika, 295.
Rim, 355.
Rishabha, 385.
Rishis. See Sages.
Roots, 316,361, 388.
Rotation. See Universe and Wheel.
Roth. See Nirukta.
Rough, 383,384.
Royal sage, 296,300.
Rudra, 338, 347, 354.
Ruin, —of soul, 236,245,279.
Ruler, 249,318, 385. See Body.
—of men, 346.
—of universe, 249, 279, 332,347.

Sabaras, 295.
Sacrifice, 241, 260, 262, 276, 279, 280, 284, 287,
288, 289, 290, 293, 309, 324, 325, 326, 330,
334, 340, 347, 353, 355, 358, 359, 360, 362,
367,376, 387.
Sage, 281, 282, 283, 286, 294, 296, 312, 314, 315,
316, 322, 334, 342, 345, 358, 360, 361, 362,
368,374,375, 382,388, 390, 393.
—seven, 281, 287. See Royal sage.
Sahya, 346.
Sakra. See Indra.
Sakuntala, 243.
Salmali, 346.
Salutation, 294, 314, 324,351, 366, 370.
Saman, 280.
Samana, 258.
Sambhu, 332.
Samnyasin. See Ascetic.
Sanatsugata, 309, 311, 314.
Sanatsugatiya, 231, 232, 234, 240, 245, 246, 249, 251, 253,
255, 282, 285, 323, 326, 327, 339,
342,343, 349, 351, 363, 364, 369.
Sanctification, 247, 341. See Purity.
Sankarakarya, (Sankaracharya) 230, 231, 239, 241,
247, 248, 251, 255, 256, 262, 263, 266, 271,
280, 290, 313, 327, 333, 339, 342, 345, 347,
353,376, 385, 386, 391.
Sankhya, 313, 332, 368, 372, 373, 374, 383, 386, 387,392.
—Karika, 240, 258, 265, 286, 291, 319, 321, 322, 329, 331,
334, 337, 351, 356, 371, 380, 382, 391.
—Sara. See Hall, F. E.
Sankhya Sutra, 244, 265, 286, 321, 331, 332, 334, 337, 339, 354, 368, 392.
—Tattvakaumudi. See Sankhya Karika.
Sanskara. See Ceremony.
Sanskrit literature. See Kavyas.
Saptahotri, 266.
Sarasvati. See Speech.
Sariraka Bhashya. See Sankarakarya (Sankaracharya).
Sarvagna Narayana. See Narayana
Sastra, 280.
Sastras, 303.
Satapatha, 248, 265.
Satyaloka. See World.
Saugatas, 377.
Savana, 277.
Savitri, 353.
Science. 388.
Scripture, 231, 238, 242, 290, 291, 314, 349, 358, 364,379, 381. See Sastras.
Season, 236, 330, 352.
Secret, 366.
Security. See fear.
Seed, 241,313, 371, 382,383.
Seeing, 309, 351. See Senses.
Self, 317.
Self-consciousness, 322,333, 336, 338.
Self-control, 236, 246,366.
Self-destruction, 279.
Sell-existent, 333,354.
Self-illumined, 342.
Self-knowledge. See Knowledge.
Self-possessed, 246, 248.
Self-restraint, 243, 249, 250, 292, 300, 312, 317, 320, 327,332, 342, 359,390, 391.
Semen, 238, 241, 261, 275, 338.
Senses, 232, 238, 242, 246, 248, 249, 251, 253, 256,
257, 261, 262, 264, 266, 269, 278, 280, 282,
283, 285, 286, 290, 292, 297 seq., 300, 305,
306, 313, 317, 318, 329, 332, 334, 336, 338,
340, 344, 348, 350, 355, 358, 360, 362, 364,
366, 368, 371, 386, 388. See Contact,
Organs, Soul, Bodily and mental.
Separation, 233, 313.
Service, 243, 324, 326.
Shade, 286, 356.
Shadga, 385.
Shadow, 312.
Sheep, 345.
Shining bodies, 291, 330, 341,353.
Siddhas, 232, 233, 235, 236, 239, 314.
Silence, 245. See Taciturnity.
Sin, 232, 233,241,246,288,290,293, 296,311,314, 317, 319,
322, 327, 340, 343, 344, 351, 355,
358,369, 372, 378, 389, 390,394.
Sinless, 233, 252, 254, 256, 314,364.
Sinsapa, 346.
Siva, 333,347.
Sixteen, 371.
Skin, 259, 261,267, 298, 305,361, 375. See Senses.
Slave, 304.
Sleep, 236,258, 259, 268, 269, 301,320, 360.
Sloth, 301,361,378, 389.
Smoke, 276,362.
Smritis, 321.
Snake, 281, 282, 283, 321, 345,347, 353, 354.
Society, 364,365.
Soft, 383,384.
Solar world, 240.
Solitary, 232, 251, 256, 287, 341, 363.
Solstices, 352.
Soma, 337,340,346, 347.
Soul, 235, 237 238, 239, 242, 246, 247, 248, 249,
250, 252, 253, 254, 256, 257, 258, 262, 263,
274, 276, 278, 279, 280, 281, 282, 286, 288,
292, 300, 304, 308, 309, 312, 331, 332, 333,
334, 336, 337, 340, 341, 342, 343, 344, 345,
351, 354, 355, 367, 369, 371, 372, 374, 375,
376, 380, 382, 385, 389,391, 392, 393, 394.
—association with, 288, 336.
—destruction of, 374.
—distinct from nature, 289.
—distinct from senses, 285,289,305.
—embodied, 232, 238, 240, 244, 249, 252.
—favor of, 234.
—high and low, 232.
—individual, 253,258,263,289,310,315,337,340, 341,350,371, 386.
—individual’s relation to supreme, 316, 342, 350.
—not active agent, 285.
—science of. 5ee Adhyatma.
—seats of, 237, 240.
Soul, supreme, 248, 259, 284, 310,342.
—access to. See Attainment.
Sound, 247, 258, 260, 266, 271, 273, 343. See Objects of sense.
Source of things, 283, 284,311, 315, 323, 333,334, 354, 357, 377, 383.
South path, 314.
—of earth, 300.
—of three worlds, 307.
—within, 302.
Space, 244, 251, 260, 289, 316, 339, 343, 356, 368, 375, 377.
Species, origin of, 244. See Eggs.
Speech, 243 257, 261, 262, 263 264, 265,266,275,
295, 336, 338, 348, 359, 364, 366.
—forms of, 265.
Speed, 357, 364, 381.
Spirit. 331,333,351, 367,368,373, 380,385,386.
Spiritual topics, 296,310.
Spontaneous earnings, 362, 365.
Sport, 251.
Sravana, 352.
Sridharasvamin, 346. 378.
Sruti. See Vedas.
Stars, 240.
State, 304. See Brahmic, Mind.
Staves, three, 318.
Steady-minded, 250, 296,300, 352.
Stinginess, 325. See Gifts.
Stomach, 252, 367.
Store-room, 253.
Story, ancient. See Itihasa.
Stotra, 280.
Straightforward, 320, 325,326,364, 373.
Stream, 284, 287,307,344,346,354,363,387.
Strength, 252, 294, 323. See Power.
Study, 269, 324, 334, 340, 355, 358, 360, 361, 362, 376.
Subjects, 295,378. See Object.
Substratum, 249, 289, 292.
Subtlety, 241, 285, 296,310,320, 336, 341,342.
Sudra, 322, 329.
Summer, 363.
Sun, 251, 277, 287, 289, 290, 303, 316, 329, 330,
337,340, 346,350,352,354,364,387.
Sunyavadins, 376.
Supporter, 257, 348.
—of universe, 258.
Supreme, 326,369,379.
Sushumna, 277,318.
Svadha, 324,370.
Svaha, 324,352, 366.
Sveta, 346.
Svetasvataropanishad, 238,249,265,308,311,313, 322, 327,
331, 332, 333, 338, 343, 348, 355, 370, 376, 379.
Sweet, 363,383,384.
Sword, 294, 302, 313.
Syadvadin, 376.
Syena, 353.
Syllable, 391. See Om.
Symbols, 307, 308, 309,350,367.

Tairthikas, 376.
Taittiriya Aranyaka, 259, 261, 262, 266, 277, 280, 327, 347, 389.
—Brahmana, 261, 262, 266.
—Upanishad, 236, 238, 244, 280, 293, 302, 343, 360, 361, 378, 385, 388,389, 300.
Taranatha Tarkavakaspati, Prof., 329,334,342.
Tarkikas, 376.
Tarpana, 325.
Taste, 257, 258. See Objects of sense.
—by another, 269, 270.
Tempers, 322.
Temptation, 327.
Ten, 373.
Texts, —Vedic, 269,290,305,322. See Mantra.
Thief, 284,324, 330, 389.
Thirst, 168,356.
Thomson, Archbishop, 268.
Thought, 259, 263, 321, 348, 350, 378. See Continuous meditation and Mind.
—evil, 323.
Thoughtless, 359.
Throat, 252, 262, 266, 271.
Tiger,—like, 230, 294.
Time, 244, 276, 316, 356,357,363, 366, 375,377.
—and place, soul unlimited by, 343,356.
—wheel of, 343, 355.
Tone, 264.
Tongue, 252,259, 261,292. See Senses.
Tortoise, 342,366.
Torture, 237,240.
Touching, 247,257,258,343. See Senses.
Tradition, 314.
Tranquillity, 232, 243, 246, 247, 248, 250, 256, 257,
277, 287, 288, 301, 307, 312, 317, 326, 342,
355,370, 372, 373, 375, 389, 392.
Transcendent Brahman, 333, 351, 372.
Transient, 246, 250, 355, 390.
Transmigration, 322. See Life, higher.
Travellers, 329, 380, 381.
Treachery, 324,344.
Trees, 241, 284, 285, 286, 294, 296, 313, 316, 321,
346, 361, 363, 365, 370,371, 373, 379, 388.
Trikutavat, 346.
Trunk, 313,371.
Truth, 280, 284, 293, 296, 311, 313, 314, 315, 324,
325, 326, 331, 335, 336, 338, 344, 351, 360,
362, 364, 366, 367, 368, 369, 370, 371, 373,
375, 378,380, 381, 384.
Tvashtri, 346.
Twice-born, 231,232,285,291,293,296,299,304, 311,
314, 316, 327, 336, 339, 340, 348, 353,

Udana, 258.
Udulomas, 377.
Udumbara, 374,379.
Uma, 347.
Unborn, 331.
Unchangeable, 317, 331, 333, 371,391.
Uncreated, 347, 391. See Self-existent.
Understanding, 236, 247, 259, 260, 267, 279, 284,
287, 302 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, 313, 316,
318, 332, 336, 337, 338, 341, 343, 344, 348,
349, 350, 351, 355, 357, 366, 367, 368, 370,
372, 377, 380, 381, 382, 383, 386, 391, 392.
See Knowledge.
Undistinguished colours, 286.
Unfathomable, 343.
Unhappiness, 232, 233, 245, 247, 255, 313, 331, 370,372. See Pain.
Unintelligent, 312, 320, 330, 351, 356, 371, 379.
Uninterrupted, 341.
Unity of everything, 312, 313, 344, 370, 374.
Universal benevolence, —form, 333, 344.
Universe, constituents of, 336.
—devoid of truth, 315.
—divisions of, 261.
—government of, 327.
—producer and destroyer of, 287, 354, 392.
Unmoved, 248,352, 391.
Unperceived, 313, 317, 318, 331, 332, 349, 350, 351.
354. 368, 371, 372, 373, 380, 382, 383,
385,386, 389, 390.
Unswerving, 336.
Untainted, 367,369,379. See Gift, Lotus-leaf, and Worlds.
Unthinkable, 354, 369.
Upanishads, 251.
Upasana. See Meditation.
Urine, 261.

Vaisampayana, 230, 394.
Vaisvanara, 259, 276.
Vaisyas, 255, 329.
Vakaspati Misra, 319, 322, 329,356, 371, 382.
Valour, 323,326, 367.
Vamadevya, 277.
Vanishing of nature, 380.
Vanity, 246,320, 321. See Pride.
Vanquished, 388, 389. See Victory.
Vanegated colours, 286, 357.
Varuna, 345,346.
Vashat, 324.
Vasishtha, 314.
Vasudeva, 230, 235, 254, 310, 312, 393.
Vasuki, 353.
Vayu, 340. See Wind.
Vedanta, 246, 331.
—Paribhasha, 258, 286, 314, 333, 338, 339, 387.
Vedas, 262, 269, 276, 306, 309, 312, 320, 322, 326,
331. 353, 354, 358, 367, 369, 378, 388, 390.
Vegetables, 353. See Herbs.
Vehicle, 345.
Venerable, 252, 267, 282, 293, 311, 377.
Vexation, 315, 324, 330, 336, 356, 378. See Agitation.
Vices, 301, 302, 303, 314.
Victory, 287,296,305,306,344.
Vignana Bhikshu, 354.
—Vada, 375.
Vindhya. 346.
Vipra, 347.
Virag, 315.
Vishamasloki, 259.
Vishnu, 261,332,333,338,345,346,347,354.
Visvamitra, 314.
Vital parts, 237, 238, 239, 297, 298, 299. See Soul, seat of.
Voice. See Speech.
Vowels, 348.
Vriddhas, 377. See Elders.
Vrikodara. See Bhima.
Vrishalas, 295.
Vrishnis, 235.
Vyana, 258.

Water, 238, 260, 281, 283, 284, 287, 289, 290, 339,
343, 344, 346, 353, 356, 359, 360, 361, 364,
365, 374, 379, 382, 384, 387.
Wealth, 233, 243, 246, 261, 284, 307, 314, 325, 331,
347,357, 359, 365, 376,392. See Belongings and Property.
—human, 255.
Weapons, 250.
—do not cut soul, 250.
Weber, A., Prof., 248.
Well, 324,354.
—holder of, 232.
—turning of, 306.See Time.
Whip, 386.
Wife, 256,307,358.
Williams, M., Prof., 243, 344, 358.
Wind, 232, 237, 238, 239, 257, 261, 337, 343, 349, 350.
—life. See Life-winds.
Womb, 237, 239, 241, 260, 321, 322, 331, 339, 353.
See Foetus and Preceptor.
Women. See Female.
Word. See Speech.
Words, 261,262, 263, 266,338, 348, 353.
World, 283.
—affairs of, 304,324.
—beginning of. See Beginning, void of.
—external and internal, 292, 337, 386.
—future, 308, 326, 378.
—higher, 354, 389.
—material, 335.
—mortal, 234, 343.
—nether. See Hell.
—of meritorious men, 321.
—release from, 235.
—survey of, 234.
—thought of, 323.
—three, 244,249, 334, 354,388.
—untainted, 317. See Current, Death, and Transient.
Worldliness, 314, 370.
Worms, 225, 321, 339, 364.
Worship, 257, 286, 377.

Yagnavalkya, 237,304,344.
Yakshas, 345, 347, 354.
Yama, 233,346.
Yaska, 225.
Yoga, 297,306.
—Sutras, 234, 248, 250, 251, 252, 260, 266, 271,
274, 285, 286, 300, 319, 322, 324, 327, 343,
372, 373, 394.
—Vasishtha, 240.
Yogakaras, (Yogacharas) 377.
Yogin, 293.
Yudhishthira, 394.